FCC ID: I88NBG4615 Wireless N Gigabit NetUSB Router

NBG4615 Wireless N Gigabit NetUSB Router Default Login Details IP Address Password http://192.168.1.1 1234 Firmware Version 1.0 Edition 1, 12/2010 www.zyxel.com www.zyxel.com Copyright 2011 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User's Guide About This User's Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG4615 using the Web Configurator. You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP networking concepts and topology. Tips for Reading Users Guides On-Screen When reading a ZyXEL Users Guide On-Screen, keep the following in mind:

If you dont already have the latest version of Adobe Reader, you can download it from http://www.adobe.com. Use the PDFs bookmarks to quickly navigate to the areas that interest you. Adobe Readers bookmarks pane opens by default in all ZyXEL Users Guide PDFs. If you know the page number or know vaguely which page-range you want to view, you can enter a number in the toolbar in Reader, then press [ENTER] to jump directly to that page. Type [CTRL]+[F] to open the Adobe Reader search utility and enter a word or phrase. This can help you quickly pinpoint the information you require. You can also enter text directly into the toolbar in Reader. To quickly move around within a page, press the [SPACE] bar. This turns your cursor into a hand with which you can grab the page and move it around freely on your screen. Embedded hyperlinks are actually cross-references to related text. Click them to jump to the corresponding section of the Users Guide PDF. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get your NBG4615 up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access. Supporting Disc The embedded Web Help contains descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information. Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents. NBG4615 Users Guide 3 About This User's Guide Documentation Feedback Send your comments, questions or suggestions to: techwriters@zyxel.com.tw Thank you!

The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 30099, Taiwan. Need More Help?

More help is available at www.zyxel.com. Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link. Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide, Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product. Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product, the answer may be here. This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products. Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products. Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well. 4 NBG4615 Users Guide About This User's Guide Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. See http://www.zyxel.com/web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. NBG4615 Users Guide 5 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this Users Guide. Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. Syntax Conventions The NBG4615 may be referred to as the NBG4615, the device, the product or the system in this Users Guide. Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example,

[ENTER] means the enter or return key on your keyboard. Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the

[ENTER] key. Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices. A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen. Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value. For example, k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024, M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on. e.g., is a shorthand for for instance, and i.e., means that is or in other words. 6 NBG4615 Users Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this Users Guide may use the following generic icons. The NBG4615 icon is not an exact representation of your device. NBG4615 Computer Notebook computer Server DSLAM Firewall Telephone Switch Router Modem NBG4615 Users Guide 7 Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged. Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. 8 NBG4615 Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide ...........................................................................................................................19 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 21 The WPS Button ........................................................................................................................ 25 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility .......................................................................................... 27 Connection Wizard .................................................................................................................... 35 Introducing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................. 47 Monitor ....................................................................................................................................... 53 NBG4615 Modes ....................................................................................................................... 59 Easy Mode ................................................................................................................................. 61 Router Mode .............................................................................................................................. 73 Access Point Mode .................................................................................................................... 81 Universal Repeater Mode .......................................................................................................... 89 WISP Mode ............................................................................................................................... 99 Tutorials ....................................................................................................................................111 Technical Reference ............................................................................................................127 Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................................... 129 IPv6 ......................................................................................................................................... 149 WAN ........................................................................................................................................ 153 LAN .......................................................................................................................................... 169 DHCP Server ........................................................................................................................... 173 NAT .......................................................................................................................................... 177 DDNS ...................................................................................................................................... 187 Static Route ............................................................................................................................. 189 RIP ........................................................................................................................................... 193 Firewall .................................................................................................................................... 195 Content Filtering ...................................................................................................................... 201 Bandwidth Management .......................................................................................................... 205 Remote Management .............................................................................................................. 215 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ............................................................................................. 217 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 225 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 239 NBG4615 Users Guide 9 Contents Overview 10 NBG4615 Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This User's Guide ..........................................................................................................3 Document Conventions............................................................................................................6 Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................8 Contents Overview ...................................................................................................................9 Table of Contents....................................................................................................................11 Part I: Users Guide................................................................................ 19 Chapter 1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................21 1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 21 1.2 Applications ......................................................................................................................... 21 1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG4615 ........................................................................................... 22 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG4615 ............................................................................ 22 1.5 LEDs .................................................................................................................................... 22 Chapter 2 The WPS Button......................................................................................................................25 2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 25 Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility......................................................................................27 3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 27 3.1.1 Quick Setup ................................................................................................................ 28 3.1.2 Installing ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility ........................................................... 28 3.2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility ............................................................................ 29 3.2.1 The Menus ................................................................................................................. 29 3.2.2 The Share Center Configuration Window .................................................................. 30 3.2.3 The Auto-Connect Printer List Window ...................................................................... 31 3.3 Manually Connecting to USB Devices ................................................................................. 31 3.4 Automatically Connecting to a USB Printer ......................................................................... 33 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard .................................................................................................................35 NBG4615 Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 35 4.2 Accessing the Wizard .......................................................................................................... 35 4.3 Connect to Internet .............................................................................................................. 36 4.3.1 Connection Type: DHCP ............................................................................................ 37 4.3.2 Connection Type: Static IP ......................................................................................... 38 4.3.3 Connection Type: PPPoE ........................................................................................... 38 4.3.4 Connection Type: PPTP ............................................................................................. 40 4.3.5 Connection Type: L2TP .............................................................................................. 41 4.4 Router Password ................................................................................................................. 43 4.5 Wireless Security ................................................................................................................. 43 4.5.1 Wireless Security: No Security ................................................................................... 43 4.5.2 Wireless Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK .................................................................. 44 Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator ........................................................................................47 5.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 47 5.2 Accessing the Web Configurator ......................................................................................... 47 5.2.1 Login Screen .............................................................................................................. 48 5.2.2 Password Screen ....................................................................................................... 49 5.2.3 Home Screen ............................................................................................................. 49 5.3 Resetting the NBG4615 ....................................................................................................... 51 5.3.1 How to Use the RESET Button .................................................................................. 52 Chapter 6 Monitor.....................................................................................................................................53 6.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 53 6.2 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................ 53 6.3 The Log Screen ................................................................................................................... 54 6.3.1 View Log .................................................................................................................... 54 6.4 BW MGMT Monitor .............................................................................................................. 55 6.5 DHCP Table ...................................................................................................................... 56 6.6 Packet Statistics ............................................................................................................... 57 6.7 WLAN Station Status ....................................................................................................... 58 Chapter 7 NBG4615 Modes......................................................................................................................59 7.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 59 7.1.1 Web Configurator Modes ........................................................................................... 59 7.1.2 Device Modes ............................................................................................................ 59 Chapter 8 Easy Mode ...............................................................................................................................61 8.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 61 12 NBG4615 Users Guide Table of Contents 8.2 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................ 62 8.3 What You Need to Know ...................................................................................................... 62 8.4 Navigation Panel ................................................................................................................. 63 8.5 Network Map ....................................................................................................................... 63 8.6 Control Panel ....................................................................................................................... 64 8.6.1 Game Engine ............................................................................................................. 65 8.6.2 Power Saving ............................................................................................................. 66 8.6.3 Content Filter .............................................................................................................. 67 8.6.4 Bandwidth MGMT ...................................................................................................... 68 8.6.5 Firewall ....................................................................................................................... 68 8.6.6 Wireless Security ....................................................................................................... 69 8.6.7 WPS ........................................................................................................................... 70 8.7 Status Screen in Easy Mode ............................................................................................... 71 Chapter 9 Router Mode............................................................................................................................73 9.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 73 9.2 Router Mode Status Screen ................................................................................................ 74 9.2.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 77 Chapter 10 Access Point Mode.................................................................................................................81 10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 81 10.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................. 81 10.3 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 82 10.3.1 Setting your NBG4615 to AP Mode ......................................................................... 82 10.3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator in Access Point Mode .......................................... 83 10.3.3 Configuring your WLAN, Bandwidth Management and Maintenance Settings ........ 83 10.4 AP Mode Status Screen .................................................................................................... 84 10.5 LAN Screen ....................................................................................................................... 86 Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode.......................................................................................................89 11.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 89 11.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................. 89 11.3 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 90 11.4 Setting your NBG4615 to Universal Repeater Mode ......................................................... 90 11.5 Universal Repeater Mode Status Screen ........................................................................... 92 11.6 Universal Repeater Screen ................................................................................................ 94 11.6.1 No Security ............................................................................................................... 95 11.6.2 Static WEP ............................................................................................................... 96 11.6.3 WPA(2)-PSK ............................................................................................................. 97 NBG4615 Users Guide 13 Table of Contents Chapter 12 WISP Mode ..............................................................................................................................99 12.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 99 12.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................. 99 12.3 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 100 12.3.1 Setting your NBG4615 to WISP Mode ................................................................... 100 12.3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator in WISP Mode .................................................... 100 12.4 WISP Mode Status Screen .............................................................................................. 101 12.5 Wireless LAN General Screen ......................................................................................... 104 12.5.1 Static WEP ............................................................................................................. 106 12.5.2 WPA(2)-PSK .......................................................................................................... 107 12.5.3 Site Survey Screen ................................................................................................ 108 Chapter 13 Tutorials................................................................................................................................. 111 13.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................111 13.2 Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS ..............................................................................111 13.2.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) ...........................................................................112 13.2.2 PIN Configuration ....................................................................................................113 13.3 Configure Wireless Security without WPS ........................................................................114 13.3.1 Configure Your Notebook ........................................................................................116 13.4 Using Multiple SSIDs on the NBG4615 ............................................................................118 13.4.1 Configuring Security Settings of Multiple SSIDs .....................................................119 13.5 Connecting the NBG4615 (in Universal Repeater Mode) to an AP or Wireless Router .. 122 Part II: Technical Reference ................................................................ 127 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN.........................................................................................................................129 14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 129 14.1.1 What You Can Do .................................................................................................. 130 14.1.2 What You Should Know ......................................................................................... 130 14.2 General Wireless LAN Screen ........................................................................................ 133 14.3 Wireless Security Screen ................................................................................................ 135 14.3.1 No Security ............................................................................................................. 135 14.3.2 WEP Encryption ..................................................................................................... 136 14.3.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK ............................................................................................ 138 14.4 MAC Filter ........................................................................................................................ 139 14.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen ..................................................................................... 140 14.6 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen ..................................................................................... 141 14.7 WPS Screen .................................................................................................................... 142 14 NBG4615 Users Guide Table of Contents 14.8 WPS Station Screen ........................................................................................................ 143 14.9 Scheduling Screen .......................................................................................................... 144 14.10 WDS Screen .................................................................................................................. 146 Chapter 15 IPv6.........................................................................................................................................149 15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 149 15.1.1 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 149 15.2 The IPv6 Screen .............................................................................................................. 150 Chapter 16 WAN........................................................................................................................................153 16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 153 16.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 153 16.3 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 154 16.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection .................................................................... 154 16.3.2 Multicast ................................................................................................................. 155 16.4 Internet Connection ......................................................................................................... 156 16.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation .......................................................................................... 156 16.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation ............................................................................................ 158 16.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation .............................................................................................. 160 16.4.4 L2TP Encapsulation ............................................................................................... 163 16.5 Advanced WAN Screen ................................................................................................... 166 16.6 IGMP Snooping Screen ................................................................................................... 167 Chapter 17 LAN.........................................................................................................................................169 17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 169 17.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 169 17.3 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 170 17.3.1 IP Pool Setup ......................................................................................................... 170 17.3.2 LAN TCP/IP ............................................................................................................ 170 17.3.3 IP Alias ................................................................................................................... 171 17.4 LAN IP Screen ................................................................................................................. 171 17.5 IP Alias Screen ................................................................................................................ 172 Chapter 18 DHCP Server..........................................................................................................................173 18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 173 18.1.1 What You Can Do .................................................................................................. 173 18.1.2 What You Need To Know ....................................................................................... 173 18.2 General ............................................................................................................................ 174 18.3 Advanced ...................................................................................................................... 175 NBG4615 Users Guide 15 Table of Contents Chapter 19 NAT.........................................................................................................................................177 19.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 177 19.1.1 What You Can Do .................................................................................................. 178 19.1.2 What You Need To Know ....................................................................................... 178 19.2 General ............................................................................................................................ 180 19.3 Application ...................................................................................................................... 181 19.4 Advanced ......................................................................................................................... 183 19.5 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 184 19.5.1 NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers ................................................. 184 19.5.2 NAT Port Forwarding Example ............................................................................... 184 19.5.3 Trigger Port Forwarding ......................................................................................... 185 19.5.4 Trigger Port Forwarding Example .......................................................................... 186 19.5.5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports ...................................................... 186 Chapter 20 DDNS......................................................................................................................................187 20.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 187 20.1.1 What You Need To Know ....................................................................................... 187 20.2 General .......................................................................................................................... 188 Chapter 21 Static Route ...........................................................................................................................189 21.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 189 21.2 IP Static Route Screen ................................................................................................... 190 Chapter 22 RIP..........................................................................................................................................193 22.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 193 22.2 RIP Screen .................................................................................................................... 193 Chapter 23 Firewall...................................................................................................................................195 23.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 195 23.1.1 What You Can Do .................................................................................................. 195 23.1.2 What You Need To Know ....................................................................................... 196 23.2 General ........................................................................................................................... 198 23.3 Services ........................................................................................................................... 198 Chapter 24 Content Filtering ...................................................................................................................201 24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 201 24.1.1 What You Need To Know ....................................................................................... 201 16 NBG4615 Users Guide Table of Contents 24.2 Content Filter ................................................................................................................... 202 24.3 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 203 24.3.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking ...................................................... 203 Chapter 25 Bandwidth Management.......................................................................................................205 25.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 205 25.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 205 25.3 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 206 25.4 General Screen .............................................................................................................. 206 25.5 Advanced Screen ........................................................................................................... 207 25.5.1 Rule Configuration: Application Rule Configuration .............................................. 209 25.5.2 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration ............................ 210 25.6 Monitor Screen .................................................................................................................211 25.6.1 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services ....................................................... 212 Chapter 26 Remote Management............................................................................................................215 26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 215 26.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 215 26.2.1 Remote Management and NAT .............................................................................. 215 26.2.2 System Timeout .................................................................................................... 216 26.3 WWW Screen ............................................................................................................... 216 Chapter 27 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)..........................................................................................217 27.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 217 27.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 217 27.2.1 NAT Traversal ........................................................................................................ 217 27.2.2 Cautions with UPnP ............................................................................................... 218 27.3 UPnP Screen .................................................................................................................. 218 27.4 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 219 27.4.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ................................................................... 219 27.4.2 Web Configurator Easy Access ............................................................................. 221 Chapter 28 Maintenance ..........................................................................................................................225 28.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 225 28.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 225 28.3 General Screen ............................................................................................................... 226 28.4 Password Screen ............................................................................................................ 226 28.5 Time Setting Screen ........................................................................................................ 228 28.6 Firmware Upgrade Screen .............................................................................................. 230 NBG4615 Users Guide 17 Table of Contents 28.7 Configuration Backup/Restore Screen ............................................................................ 231 28.8 Reset/Restart Screen ...................................................................................................... 233 28.9 System Operation Mode Overview .................................................................................. 234 28.10 Sys OP Mode Screen .................................................................................................... 236 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................239 29.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 239 29.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ...................................................................... 239 29.3 NBG4615 Access and Login ........................................................................................... 240 29.4 Internet Access ................................................................................................................ 242 29.5 Resetting the NBG4615 to Its Factory Defaults ............................................................... 244 29.6 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 244 29.7 ZyXEL Share Center Utility Problems ............................................................................. 246 Appendix A Product Specifications.......................................................................................249 29.8 Wall-mounting Instructions .............................................................................................. 251 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions........................................253 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting ...........................................................................265 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address...........................................................277 Appendix E Wireless LANs ..................................................................................................305 Appendix F Common Services.............................................................................................321 Appendix G IPv6 ..................................................................................................................325 Appendix H Open Software Announcements.......................................................................337 Appendix I Legal Information................................................................................................379 Index.......................................................................................................................................387 18 NBG4615 Users Guide PART I Users Guide 19 20 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG4615. The NBG4615 extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring, providing easy network access to mobile users. You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11b/g/n compatible devices. A range of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available for secure Internet computing. Note: Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility (for NetUSB functionality) from the included disc, or download the latest version from the zyxel.com website. TM 1.2 Applications Your can create the following networks using the NBG4615:

Wired. You can connect network devices via the Ethernet ports of the NBG4615 so that they can communicate with each other and access the Internet. Wireless. Wireless clients can connect to the NBG4615 to access network resources. WAN. Connect to a broadband modem/router for Internet access. WPS. Create an instant network connection with another WPS-compatible device, sharing your network connection with it. NetUSB. The NBG4615 allows you to connect a USB device (such as printer, scanner, or portable hard disk) directly to the USB port and then share that device over the Internet. You can also connect a USB to the NBG4615, which can then share up to 3 additional USB devices with the rest of your personal home network. NBG4615 Users Guide 21 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG4615 Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG4615. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). You can use the WPS button or the WPS section of the Web Configurator to set up a wireless network with your ZyXEL Device. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the NBG4615 using a (supported) web browser. 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG4615 Do the following things regularly to make the NBG4615 more secure and to manage the NBG4615 more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the NBG4615 to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the NBG4615. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.5 LEDs Figure 1 Front Panel LAN 1-4 WAN USB 1-2 Power WLAN/WPS 22 NBG4615 Users Guide The following table describes the LEDs and the WPS button. Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 Front panel LEDs and WPS button LED Power COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green On LAN 1-4 Off Green On Blinking Amber Blinking WAN Off Green On Blinking Amber Blinking WLAN/WPS Off Green On Blinking On Blinking USB 1-2 Off Green Off The NBG4615 is receiving power and functioning properly. The NBG4615 is not receiving power. The NBG4615s LAN connection is ready. The NBG4615 is sending/receiving data through the LAN with a 10/100Mbps transmission rate. The NBG4615 is sending/receiving data through the LAN with a 1000Mbps transmission rate. The LAN connection is not ready, or has failed. The NBG4615s WAN connection is ready. The NBG4615 is sending/receiving data through the WAN with a 10/100Mbps transmission rate. The NBG4615 is sending/receiving data through the WAN with a 1000Mbps transmission rate. The WAN connection is not ready, or has failed. The NBG4615 is ready, but is not sending/

receiving data through the wireless LAN. The NBG4615 is sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN. The NBG4615 is negotiating a WPS connection with a wireless client. The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed. The NBG4615 has a USB device installed. The NBG4615 is transmitting and/or receiving data from routers through an installed USB device. There is no USB device connected to the NBG4615. NBG4615 Users Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introduction 24 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 2 The WPS Button 2.1 Overview Your NBG4615 supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. For more information on using WPS, see Section 13.2 on page 111. NBG4615 Users Guide 25 Chapter 2 The WPS Button 26 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 3.1 Overview Share Center Utility allows you to work with the USB devices The ZyXEL NetUSB that are connected directly to the NBG4615 as if they are connected directly to your computer. This allows you to easily share USB-based devices such as printers, scanners, portable hard disks, MP3 players, faxes, and digital cameras

(to name a few) with all the other people in your home or office as long as they are connected to the NBG4615 and have the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility installed. Note: Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility (for NetUSB functionality) from the included disc, or download the latest version from the zyxel.com website. Figure 2 Example of NetUSB NBG4615 Users Guide 27 Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility In this example, a USB printer, fax machine, and scanner are all connected to a USB hub. The hub is in turn connected directly to the NBG4615. Any computer with a ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility installed on it and which is connected to the NBG4615s LAN ports can access these devices. Note: A USB hub attached to the NBG4615 requires its own power adapter. 3.1.1 Quick Setup This section shows you how to get started using the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility. 1 Install the ZyXEL NetUSB NBG4615. Share Center Utility on each computer connected to the 2 Connect a USB device to the USB port on the NBG4615. Note: If you are connecting multiple devices to the NBG4615, first connect a USB hub to the NBG4615 then connect your other USB devices to it. 3 Run the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility to display a list of all connected USB devices, then use it to connect your computer to them. 3.1.2 Installing ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Before you can access USB devices connected to the NBG4615, you must first install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility on any computer on your LAN to which you want to allow access to these devices. Note: In order to properly use the utility with your NBG4615, ensure that the NBG4615 firmware is version v1.00(BWQ.0) or higher. See Chapter 28 on page 230 for information on updating your devices firmware. To install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility:

1 Insert the disc that came with your NBG4615 into your computers disc drive. 2 Run the Setup program by double-clicking it and then follow the on-screen instructions for installing it on your computer. Note: The following operating systems are supported: Windows XP/Vista/7 (32 and 64-bit versions). 28 NBG4615 Users Guide 3 To open the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility, double-click its system tray icon. Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 3.2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility This section describes the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility main window. Figure 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Window 3.2.1 The Menus This section describes the utilitys menus. Figure 4 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Menus NBG4615 Users Guide 29 Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 3.2.2 The Share Center Configuration Window This section describes the utilitys configuration window, which allows you to set certain options for the utility. These options do not apply to the USB devices connected to the NBG4615. You can open it by clicking the Tools > Configuration menu command. Figure 5 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Configuration Window The following table describes the labels in this window. Table 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Configuration Window LABEL Basic DESCRIPTION Select this to run the utility automatically when you log into or start up Windows. Select a language for the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility. You must restart the utility for the change to take effect. Click this to save your changes and close the window. Click this cancel to close the window without saving. Click this to save your changes without closing the window. Language OK Cancel Apply 30 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 3.2.3 The Auto-Connect Printer List Window This section describes the utilitys auto-connect printer list window. You can open it by clicking the Tools > Auto-Connect Printer List menu command. Figure 6 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Auto-Connect Printer List Window The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Auto-Connect Printer List Window LABEL Server IP & Printer Name Windows Printer Name Delete Close DESCRIPTION Displays a list of print server IPs and printer names connected to this NBG4615. Displays a corresponding list of Windows printer names connected to this devices listed in the other list. Select an printer from the list and click this to remove it. Click this to close the window. 3.3 Manually Connecting to USB Devices This example shows you how to connect to a USB device over your NBG4615 network. Makes sure that you have first installed the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility on the computer to which you want to connect the USB devices. Note: If you do this with a USB printer but do not yet have the print driver installed you will be prompted to install one by the Windows New Hardware Wizard. NBG4615 Users Guide 31 Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 1 Connect a USB device to the NBG4615. 2 In the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility, select the device and click Connect. 32 NBG4615 Users Guide 3 The device mounts on your system. Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 3.4 Automatically Connecting to a USB Printer This example shows you how to set your computer to automatically connect to a shared USB printer over your NBG4615 network each time you log into your computer. Makes sure that you have first installed the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility. 1 Connect a USB printer to the NBG4615. NBG4615 Users Guide 33 Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 2 Open the ZyXEL NetUSB Sharing Center Utility on the computer that you want to use to connect to the printer. Click the Connect button. You may be prompted to install a printer driver or to configure other settings. 3 Finally, click the Auto-Connect Printer menu and select Set Auto-Connect Printer from the menu. 34 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 4 Connection Wizard 4.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the Web Configurator. The Web Configurators wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet. Refer to your ISP for your Internet account information. Leave a field blank if you dont have that information. 4.2 Accessing the Wizard Launch your web browser and type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address. Type "1234" (default) as the password and click Login. Note: The Wizard appears when the NBG4615 is accessed for the first time or when you reset the NBG4615 to its default factory settings. The Wizard screen opens. Choose your Language and click Connect to Internet. Figure 7 Welcome NBG4615 Users Guide 35 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4.3 Connect to Internet The NBG4615 offers five Internet connection types. They are Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP or L2TP. The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using. Figure 8 Detecting your Internet Connection Type If the wizard does not detect a connection type, you must select one from the drop-down list box. Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type. Note: If you get an error message, check your hardware connections. Make sure your Internet connection is up and running. The following screen depends on your Internet connection type. Enter the details provided by your Internet Service Provider (ISP) in the fields (if any). Figure 9 Internet Connection Type Your NBG4615 detects the following Internet Connection type. Table 4 Internet Connection Type CONNECTION DESCRIPTION TYPE Static IP Select the Static IP if an administrator assigns the IP address of your computer. Select the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. NBG4615 Users Guide DHCP 36 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard Table 4 Internet Connection Type (continued) CONNECTION TYPE PPPoE DESCRIPTION PPTP L2TP Select the PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) option for a dial-up connection. Select the PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) option for a dial-up connection, and your ISP gave you an IP address and/or subnet mask. Select the L2TP (Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol) if you are connecting to another device over another network (like the Internet or VPN). 4.3.1 Connection Type: DHCP Choose DHCP as the Internet Connection Type when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Click Next. Figure 10 Internet Connection Type: DHCP Note: If you get an error screen after clicking Next, you might have selected the wrong Internet Connection type. Click Back, make sure your Internet connection is working and select the right Connection Type. Contact your ISP if you are not sure of your Internet Connection type. NBG4615 Users Guide 37 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4.3.2 Connection Type: Static IP Choose Static IP as the Internet Connection Type if your ISP assigned an IP address for your Internet connection. Click Next. Figure 11 Internet Connection Type: Static IP The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select the Static IP option. Table 5 Internet Connection Type: Static IP LABEL Internet Connection Type IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Enter the IP address provided by your ISP. Enter the IP subnet mask in this field. Enter the gateway IP address in this field. DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NBG4615 uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server. Secondary DNS Exit Back Next Enter the primary DNS server's IP address in the fields provided. Enter the secondary DNS server's IP address in the fields provided. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. 4.3.3 Connection Type: PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) functions as a dial-up connection. PPPoE is an IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) standard specifying how a host 38 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard personal computer interacts with a broadband modem (for example DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) to achieve access to high-speed data networks. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for instance, RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP/

carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber's site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG4615 (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG4615 does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers will have Internet access. Figure 12 Internet Connection Type: PPPoE The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select the PPPoE option for a dial-up connection. Table 6 Internet Connection Type: PPPoE LABEL Internet Connection Type Dynamic IP Static IP Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select this radio button, provided by your ISP to give the NBG4615 a fixed, unique IP address. Type the name of your service provider. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the user name above. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. 39 IP Address User Name Password Exit NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard Table 6 Internet Connection Type: PPPoE (continued) LABEL Back Next DESCRIPTION Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. 4.3.4 Connection Type: PPTP Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP. The NBG4615 supports one PPTP server connection at any given time. Figure 13 Internet Connection Type: PPTP The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 7 Internet Connection Type: PPTP LABEL Internet Connection Type DESCRIPTION Select PPTP from the drop-down list box. To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection. Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select this radio button, provided by your ISP to give the NBG4615 a fixed, unique IP address. Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP. Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given). Dynamic IP Static IP PPTP Address PPTP Subnet Mask 40 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard DESCRIPTION Type the gateway IP address of the PPTP server. Table 7 Internet Connection Type: PPTP (continued) LABEL PPTP Gateway IP Address PPTP Server IP Address User Name Password Exit Back Next Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the User Name above. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. Type the server IP address of the PPTP server. 4.3.5 Connection Type: L2TP The Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) works at layer 2 (the data link layer) to tunnel network traffic between two peer devices over another network (like the Internet). Figure 14 Internet Connection Type: L2TP The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 8 Internet Connection Type: L2TP LABEL Internet Connection Type Dynamic IP DESCRIPTION Select L2TP from the drop-down list box. Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select this radio button, provided by your ISP to give the NBG4615 a fixed, unique IP address. Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP. Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given). Static IP L2TP Address L2TP Subnet Mask NBG4615 Users Guide 41 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard DESCRIPTION Type the gateway IP address of the L2TP server. Table 8 Internet Connection Type: L2TP (continued) LABEL L2TP Gateway IP Address L2TP Server IP Address User Name Password Exit Back Next Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the User Name above. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. Type the server IP address of the L2TP server. The NBG4615 connects to the Internet. Figure 15 Connecting to the Internet Note: If the Wizard successfully connects to the Internet, it proceeds to the next step. If you get an error message, go back to the previous screen and make sure you have entered the correct information provided by your ISP. 42 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4.4 Router Password Change the login password in the following screen. Enter the new password and retype it to confirm. Click Next to proceed with the Wireless Security screen. Figure 16 Router Password 4.5 Wireless Security Configure Wireless Settings. Configure the wireless network settings on your NBG4615 in the following screen. The fields that show up depend on the kind of security you select. 4.5.1 Wireless Security: No Security Choose No Security in the Wireless Security screen to let wireless devices within range access your wireless network. Figure 17 Wireless Security: No Security NBG4615 Users Guide 43 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 9 Wireless Security: No Security LABEL Wireless Network Name

(SSID) DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. If you change this field on the NBG4615, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. Select a Security level from the drop-down list box. Choose No Security to have no wireless LAN security configured. If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG4615, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. Security mode Exit Back Next 4.5.2 Wireless Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK security in the Wireless Security screen to set up a password for your wireless network. Figure 18 Wireless Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK 44 NBG4615 Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 4 Connection Wizard Table 10 Wireless Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK LABEL Wireless Network Name

(SSID) DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. If you change this field on the NBG4615, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. Select a Security level from the drop-down list box. Security mode Wireless password Verify Password Exit Back Next Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK security to configure a Pre-Shared Key. Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA-PSK or WPA2-

PSK respectively. Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters. You can set up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. Retype the password to confirm. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. Congratulations! Open a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, to visit your favorite website. Note: If you cannot access the Internet when your computer is connected to one of the NBG4615s LAN ports, check your connections. Then turn the NBG4615 off, wait for a few seconds then turn it back on. If that does not work, log in to the web configurator again and check you have typed all information correctly. See the Users Guide for more suggestions. Figure 19 Congratulations You can also click GO to open the Easy Mode Web Configurator of your NBG4615. NBG4615 Users Guide 45 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard You have successfully set up your NBG4615 to operate on your network and access the Internet. You are now ready to connect wirelessly to your NBG4615 and access the Internet. 46 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 5 Introducing the Web Configurator 5.1 Overview This chapter describes how to access the NBG4615 Web Configurator and provides an overview of its screens. The Web Configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy setup and management of the NBG4615 via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions, or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter (Chapter 29 on page 239) to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 5.2 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your NBG4615 hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or computer network to connect to the NBG4615 (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 Launch your web browser. Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address. Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address. NBG4615 Users Guide 47 Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator 5.2.1 Login Screen Note: If this is the first time you are accessing the Web Configurator, you may be redirected to the Wizard. Refer to Chapter 4 on page 35 for the Connection Wizard screens. The Web Configurator initially displays the following login screen. Figure 20 Login screen The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 11 Login screen LABEL Password Language DESCRIPTION Type "1234" (default) as the password. Select the language you want to use to configure the Web Configurator. Click Login. This shows the current weather, either in celsius or fahrenheit, of the city you specify in Section 5.2.3.1 on page 50. This shows the time (hh:mm:ss) and date (yyyy:mm:dd) of the timezone you select in Section 5.2.3.2 on page 51 or Section 28.5 on page 228. The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM. 48 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator 5.2.2 Password Screen You should see a screen asking you to change your password (highly recommended) as shown next. Figure 21 Change Password Screen The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 12 Change Password Screen LABEL New Password Retype to Confirm Apply Ignore DESCRIPTION Type a new password. Retype the password for confirmation. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Ignore if you do not want to change the password this time. Note: The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires (default five minutes; go to Chapter 28 on page 225 to change this). Simply log back into the NBG4615 if this happens. 5.2.3 Home Screen If you have previously logged into the Web Configurator but did not click Logout, you may be redirected to the Home screen. You can also open this screen by clicking Home (

Mode or Expert mode screens. or

) in the Easy NBG4615 Users Guide 49 Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator The Home screen displays as follows. Figure 22 Home Screen The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 Home Screen LABEL Go Language DESCRIPTION Click this to open the Easy Mode Web Configurator. Select a language to go to the Easy mode Web Configurator in that language and click Login.

(This is just an example). This shows the current weather, either in celsius or fahrenheit, of the city you specify in Section 5.2.3.1 on page 50.

(This is just an example). This shows the time (hh:mm:ss) and date

(yyyy:mm:dd) of the timezone you select in Section 5.2.3.2 on page 51 or Section 28.5 on page 228. 5.2.3.1 Weather Edit You can change the temperature unit and select the location for which you want to know the weather. Click the icon to change the Weather display. Figure 23 Change Weather 50 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 Change Weather LABEL oC or oF Change Location Finish DESCRIPTION Choose which temperature unit you want the NBG4615 to display. Select the location for which you want to know the weather. If the city you want is not listed, choose one that is closest to it. Click this to apply the settings and refresh the date and time display. 5.2.3.2 Time/Date Edit One timezone can cover more than one country. You can choose a particular country in which the NBG4615 is located and have the NBG4615 display and use the current time and date for its logs. Click the icon to change the Weather display. Figure 24 Change Password Screen The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 15 Change Password Screen LABEL Change time zone Finish DESCRIPTION Select the specific country whose current time and date you want the NBG4615 to display. Click this to apply the settings and refresh the weather display. Note: You can also edit the timezone in Section 28.5 on page 228. 5.3 Resetting the NBG4615 If you forget your password or IP address, or you cannot access the Web Configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG4615 to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved, the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address will be reset to 192.168.1.1. NBG4615 Users Guide 51 Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator 5.3.1 How to Use the RESET Button 1 Make sure the power LED is on. 2 3 Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart/reboot the NBG4615. Press the RESET button for longer than 5 seconds to set the NBG4615 back to its factory-default configurations. 52 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 6 Monitor 6.1 Overview This chapter discusses read-only information related to the device state of the NBG4615. To access the Monitor screens, go to Expert Mode after login, then click Click open all to show the complete menu. You can also click the links in the Summary table of the Status screen to view the bandwidth consumed, packets sent/received as well as the status of clients connected to the NBG4615. 6.2 What You Can Do Use the Log screen to see the logs for the activity on the NBG4615 (Section 6.3 on page 54). Use the BW MGMT Monitor screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using (Section 6.4 on page 55). Use the DHCP Table screen to view information related to your DHCP status

(Section 6.5 on page 56). use the Packet Statistics screen to view port status, packet specific statistics, the "system up time" and so on (Section 6.6 on page 57). Use the WLAN Station Status screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615 (Section 6.7 on page 58). NBG4615 Users Guide 53 Chapter 6 Monitor 6.3 The Log Screen The Web Configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG4615s logs in one location. 6.3.1 View Log Use the View Log screen to see the logged messages for the NBG4615. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Select what logs you want to see from the Display drop list. The log choices depend on your settings in the Log Settings screen. Click Refresh to renew the log screen. Click Clear to delete all the logs. Figure 25 View Log 54 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 6 Monitor You can configure which logs to display in the View Log screen. Go to the Log Settings screen and select the logs you wish to display. Click Apply to save your settings. Click Refresh to start the screen afresh. Figure 26 Log Settings 6.4 BW MGMT Monitor The Bandwidth Management (BW MGMT) Monitor allows you to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using. The bandwidth is measured in kilobytes per second (kbps). The monitor shows what kinds of applications are running in the network, the maximum kbps that each application can use, as well as the percentage of bandwidth it is using. Figure 27 Summary: BW MGMT Monitor NBG4615 Users Guide 55 Chapter 6 Monitor 6.5 DHCP Table DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG4615s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG4615 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on that network, or else the computer must be manually configured. Click the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including MAC Address, IP Address, and Expiration time) of all network clients using the NBG4615s DHCP server. Figure 28 Summary: DHCP Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Summary: DHCP Table LABEL

MAC Address This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer. Host Name field. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. This field displays the time when the IP address and MAC address association ends. Click Refresh to renew the screen. IP Address Expires in Refresh 56 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 6 Monitor 6.6 Packet Statistics Click the Packet Statistics (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-

only information here includes port status, packet specific statistics and the

"system up time". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen. Figure 29 Summary: Packet Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 17 Summary: Packet Statistics LABEL Port Status DESCRIPTION This is the NBG4615s port type. For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down when the line is disconnected. For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if youre using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial

(starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays Down when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled. This is the number of transmitted packets on this port. This is the number of received packets on this port. This is the number of collisions on this port. This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port. This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port. This is the total time the NBG4615 has been for each session. This is the total time the NBG4615 has been on. Enter the time interval in seconds for refreshing statistics in this field. Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval(s) field. Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Tx B/s Rx B/s Up Time System Up Time Poll Interval(s) Set Interval Stop NBG4615 Users Guide 57 Chapter 6 Monitor 6.7 WLAN Station Status Click the WLAN Station Status (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615 in the Association List. Association means that a wireless client (for example, your network or computer with a wireless network card) has connected successfully to the AP (or wireless router) using the same SSID, channel and security settings. Figure 30 Summary: Wireless Association List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Summary: Wireless Association List LABEL

MAC Address Association Time DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station. This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station. This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the NBG4615s WLAN network. Click Refresh to reload the list. Refresh 58 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 7 NBG4615 Modes 7.1 Overview This chapter introduces the different modes available on your NBG4615. First, the term mode refers to two things in this Users Guide. Web Configurator mode. This refers to the Web Configurator interface you want to use for editing NBG4615 features. Device mode. This is the operating mode of your NBG4615, or simply how the NBG4615 is being used in the network. 7.1.1 Web Configurator Modes This refers to the configuration interface of the Web Configurator, which has two modes:

Easy: The Web Configurator shows this mode by default. Refer to Chapter 8 on page 61 for more information on the screens in this mode. This interface may be sufficient for users who just want to use the device. Expert: Advanced users can change to this mode to customize all the functions of the NBG4615. Click Expert Mode after logging into the Web Configurator. The Users Guide Chapter 5 on page 47 through Chapter 28 on page 236 discusses the screens in this mode. 7.1.2 Device Modes This refers to the operating mode of the NBG4615, which can act as a:

Router: This is the default device mode of the NBG4615. Use this mode to connect the local network to another network, like the Internet. Go to Section 9.2 on page 74 to view the Status screen in this mode. Access Point: Use this mode if you want to extend your network by allowing network devices to connect to the NBG4615 wirelessly. Go to Section 10.4 on page 84 to view the Status screen in this mode. NBG4615 Users Guide 59 Chapter 7 NBG4615 Modes Universal Repeater: In this mode, the NBG4615 can be an access point and a wireless client at the same time. Use this mode if there is an existing wireless router or access point in your network and you also want to allow clients to connect to the NBG4615. Go to Section 11.5 on page 92 to view the Status screen in this mode. WISP: Use this mode if there is an existing wireless router or access point in the network to which you want to connect your local network. Go to Section 12.4 on page 101 to view the Status screen in this mode. The following figure is a simple illustration of the device configuration modes of the NBG4615. Figure 31 Device Mode Example For more information on these modes and to change the mode of your NBG4615, refer to Chapter 28 on page 236. The menu for changing device modes is available in Expert mode only. Note: Choose your Device Mode carefully to avoid having to change it later. When changing to another mode, the IP address of the NBG4615 changes. The running applications and services of the network devices connected to the NBG4615 can be interrupted. In WISP mode, you should know the SSID and wireless security details of the access point to which you want to connect. 60 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 8 Easy Mode 8.1 Overview The Web Configurator is set to Easy Mode by default. You can configure several key features of the NBG4615 in this mode. This mode is useful to users who are not fully familiar with some features that are usually intended for network administrators. When you log in to the Web Configurator, the following screen opens. Figure 32 Easy Mode: Network Map Navigation Panel Network Map Go to Status Screen Control Panel NBG4615 Users Guide 61 Chapter 8 Easy Mode Click Status to open the following screen. Figure 33 Easy Mode: Status Screen Navigation Panel Go to Network Map Screen Status Screen Control Panel 8.2 What You Can Do You can do the following in this mode:

Use this Navigation Panel to opt out of the Easy mode (Section 8.4 on page 63). Use the Network Map screen to check if your NBG4615 can ping the gateway and whether it is connected to the Internet (Section 8.5 on page 63). Use the Control Panel to configure and enable NBG4615 features, including wireless security, wireless scheduling and bandwidth management and so on

(Section 8.6 on page 64). Use the Status Screen to view read-only information about the NBG4615, including the WAN IP, MAC Address of the NBG4615 and the firmware version

(Section 8.7 on page 71). 8.3 What You Need to Know Between the different device modes, the Control Panel (Section 8.6 on page 64) changes depending on which features are applicable to the mode:

Router Mode: All Control Panel features are available. 62 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode Access Point Mode: Only Power Saving and Wireless Security are available. Universal Repeater Mode: Only Power Saving and Wireless Security are available. WISP Mode: The available features for this mode are Game Console, Content Filter, Bandwidth MGMT, and Firewall. 8.4 Navigation Panel Use this navigation panel to opt out of the Easy mode. Figure 34 Control Panel The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Control Panel ITEM Home Expert Mode Logout 8.5 Network Map DESCRIPTION Click this to go to the Login page. Click this to change to Expert mode and customize features of the NBG4615. Click this to end the Web Configurator session. Note: The Network MAP is viewable by Windows XP (need to install patch), Windows Vista and Windows 7 users only. For Windows XP (Service Pack 2) users, you can see the network devices connected to the NBG4615 by downloading the LLTD (Link Layer Topology Discovery) patch from the Microsoft Website. Note: Dont worry if the Network Map does not display in your web browser. This feature may not be supported by your system. You can still configure the Control Panel (Section 8.6 on page 64) in the Easy Mode and the NBG4615 features that you want to use in the Expert Mode. NBG4615 Users Guide 63 Chapter 8 Easy Mode When you log into the Network Configurator, the Network Map is shown as follows. Figure 35 Network Map The line connecting the NBG4615 to the gateway becomes green when the NBG4615 is able to ping the gateway. It becomes red when the ping initiating from the NBG4615 does not get a response from the gateway. The same rule applies to the line connecting the gateway to the Internet. You can also view the devices (represented by icons indicating the kind of network device) connected to the NBG4615, including those connecting wirelessly. Right-

click on the NBG4615 icon to refresh the network map and go to the Wizard. Right click on the other icons to view information about the device. 8.6 Control Panel The features configurable in Easy Mode are shown in the Control Panel. Figure 36 Control Panel Switch ON to enable the feature. Otherwise, switch OFF. If the feature is turned on, the green light flashes. If it is turned off, the red light flashes. Additionally, click the feature to open a screen where you can edit its settings. 64 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Control Panel ITEM Game Engine DESCRIPTION Switch ON to maximize bandwidth for gaming traffic in your network. Otherwise, switch OFF. Power Saving Refer to Section 8.6.1 on page 65 to see this screen. Click this to schedule the wireless feature of the NBG4615. Content Filter Disabling the wireless function helps lower the energy consumption of the NBG4615. Switch ON to apply wireless scheduling. Otherwise, switch OFF. Refer to Section 8.6.2 on page 66 to see this screen. Click this to restrict access to certain websites, based on keywords contained in URLs, to which you do not want users in your network to open. Switch ON to apply website filtering. Otherwise, switch OFF. Bandwidth MGMT Refer to Section 8.6.3 on page 67 to see this screen. Click this to edit bandwidth management for predefined applications. Switch ON to have the NBG4615 management bandwidth for uplink and downlink traffic according to an application or service. Otherwise, switch OFF. Refer to Section 8.6.4 on page 68 to see this screen. Switch ON to ensure that your network is protected from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. Otherwise, switch OFF. Refer to Section 8.6.5 on page 68 to see this screen. Click this to configure the wireless security, such as SSID, security mode and WPS key on your NBG4615. Refer to Section 8.6.6 on page 69 to see this screen. Firewall Wireless Security 8.6.1 Game Engine When this feature is enabled, the NBG4615 maximizes the bandwidth for gaming traffic that it forwards out through an interface. Figure 37 Game Engine NBG4615 Users Guide 65 Chapter 8 Easy Mode Note: When this is switched on, the Game Console tab in the Bandwidth Mgmt screen is automatically positioned on top. Turn this off if your network is not using gaming. Click OK to close this screen. 8.6.2 Power Saving Use this screen to set the day of the week and time of the day when your wireless LAN is turned on and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default. Disabling the wireless capability lowers the energy consumption of the of the NBG4615. Figure 38 Power Saving The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Power Saving LABEL WLAN Status Day DESCRIPTION Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off

(depending on what you selected in the WLAN Status field). This field works in conjunction with the Day and For the following times fields. Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off. If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days. This field works in conjunction with the For the following times field. 66 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode Table 21 Power Saving (continued) LABEL For the following times

(24-Hour Format) DESCRIPTION Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute (min) drop down boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute (min) drop down boxes. If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields. If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields. In this time format, midnight is 00:00 and progresses up to 24:00. For example, 6:00 PM is 18:00. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Reset 8.6.3 Content Filter Use this screen to restrict access to certain websites, based on keywords contained in URLs, to which you do not want users in your network to open. Figure 39 Content Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 22 Content Filter LABEL Add DESCRIPTION Click Add after you have typed a keyword. Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed. Note: The NBG4615 does not recognize wildcard characters as keywords. Delete When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request. Highlight a keyword in the text box and click Delete to remove it. The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply. NBG4615 Users Guide 67 Chapter 8 Easy Mode Table 22 Content Filter (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to close this screen without saving any changes. 8.6.4 Bandwidth MGMT Use this screen to set bandwidth allocation to pre-defined services and applications for bandwidth allocation. The NBG4615 uses bandwidth management for incoming and outgoing traffic. Rank the services and applications by dragging them accordingly from High to Low and click Apply. Click Cancel to close the screen. Figure 40 Bandwidth MGNT Use your mouse to drag the items according to how you want to prioritize them. Left-click and slide up or down. 8.6.5 Firewall Enable this feature to protect the network from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. The NBG4615 blocks repetitive pings from the WAN that can otherwise cause systems to slow down or hang. Figure 41 Firewall Click OK to close this screen. 68 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode 8.6.6 Wireless Security Use this screen to configure security for your the Wireless LAN. You can enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode in the following screen. Note: You can enable the Wireless function of your NBG4615 by first turning on the switch in the back panel. Figure 42 Wireless Security The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 23 Wireless Security DESCRIPTION LABEL

(Service Set IDentity) The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a Wireless Network wireless station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 Name (SSID) keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Security mode Wireless password Verify password Apply Cancel WPS Select No Security to allow any client to connect to this network without authentication. This field appears when you choose wither WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK as the security mode. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive keyboard characters. Type the password again to confirm. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to close this screen. Click this to configure the WPS screen. You can transfer the wireless settings configured here (Wireless Security screen) to another wireless device that supports WPS. NBG4615 Users Guide 69 Chapter 8 Easy Mode 8.6.7 WPS Use this screen to add a wireless station to the network using WPS. Click WPS in the Wireless Security to open the following screen. Figure 43 Wireless Security: WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 24 Wireless Security: WPS LABEL Wireless Security WPS DESCRIPTION Click this to go back to the Wireless Security screen. Create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button. The NBG4615 scans for a WPS-enabled device within the range and performs wireless security information synchronization. Note: After you click the WPS button on this screen, you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless station, you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes. Create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client's PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the NBG4615s interface and pushing this button. Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless stations utility. Then click Register to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization. Click Exit to close this screen. Register Exit 70 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode 8.7 Status Screen in Easy Mode In the Network Map screen, click Status to view read-only information about the NBG4615. Figure 44 Status Screen in Easy Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Status Screen in Easy Mode ITEM Name DESCRIPTION This is the name of the NBG4615 in the network. You can change this in the Maintenance > General screen in Section 28.3 on page 226. This is the current system date and time. The date is in YYYY:MM:DD (Year-Month-Day) format. The time is in HH:MM:SS (Hour:Minutes:Seconds) format. This is the IP address of the WAN port. This is the MAC address of the NBG4615. This shows the firmware version of the NBG4615. The firmware version format shows the trunk version, model code and release number. This shows the SSID of the wireless network. You can configure this in the Wireless Security screen (Section 8.6.6 on page 69;

Section 14.2 on page 133). This shows the wireless security used by the NBG4615. Time WAN IP MAC Address Firmware Version Wireless Network Name Security NBG4615 Users Guide 71 Chapter 8 Easy Mode 72 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 9 Router Mode 9.1 Overview The NBG4615 is set to router mode by default. Routers are used to connect the local network to another network (for example, the Internet). In the figure below, the NBG4615 connects the local network (LAN1 ~ LAN4) to the Internet. Figure 45 NBG4615 Network Modem Note: The Status screen is shown after changing to the Expert mode of the Web Configurator. It varies depending on the device mode of your NBG4615. NBG4615 Users Guide 73 Chapter 9 Router Mode 9.2 Router Mode Status Screen Click to open the status screen. Figure 46 Status Screen: Router Mode The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen. Table 26 Status Screen Icon Key: Router Mode ICON DESCRIPTION Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information. Click this icon to go to Easy Mode. See Chapter 8 on page 61. Click this to go to the Home page. See Chapter 6 on page 53. Select a number of seconds or None from the drop-down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics. 74 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 9 Router Mode Table 26 Status Screen Icon Key: Router Mode (continued) ICON DESCRIPTION Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics. Click this icon to see the Status page. The information in this screen depends on the device mode you select. Click this icon to see the Monitor navigation menu. Click this icon to see the Configuration navigation menu. Click this icon to see the Maintenance navigation menu. The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen. Table 27 Status Screen: Router Mode DESCRIPTION LABEL Logout Click this at any time to exit the Web Configurator. Device Information Host Name Firmware Version Sys OP Mode WAN Information

- MAC Address

- IP Address

- IP Subnet Mask

- Default Gateway

- DHCP LAN Information

- MAC Address

- IP Address

- IP Subnet Mask

- DHCP WLAN Information

- WLAN OP Mode

- MAC Address

- Status

- Name (SSID)

- Channel NBG4615 Users Guide This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > General screen. It is for identification purposes. This is the firmware version and the date created. This is the device mode (Section 7.1.2 on page 59) to which the NBG4615 is set - Router Mode. This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the WAN ports IP address. This shows the WAN ports subnet mask. This shows the WAN ports gateway IP address. This shows the LAN ports DHCP role - Client or None. This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the LAN ports IP address. This shows the LAN ports subnet mask. This shows the LAN ports DHCP role - Server or Disable. This is the device mode (Section 7.1.2 on page 59) to which the NBG4615s wireless LAN is set - Access Point Mode. This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN - ON or OFF. This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4615 in the wireless LAN. This shows the channel number which you select manually. 75 Chapter 9 Router Mode Table 27 Status Screen: Router Mode (continued) LABEL

- Operating Channel

- Security Mode

- 802.11 Mode

- WPS System Status Item Data System Up Time Current Date/Time System Resource

- CPU Usage

- Memory Usage System Setting

- Firewall

- Bandwidth Management

- UPnP

- Configuration Mode Interface Status Interface Status Rate Summary DESCRIPTION This shows the channel number which the NBG4615 is currently using over the wireless LAN. This shows the level of wireless security the NBG4615 is using. This shows the wireless standard. This displays Configured when the WPS has been set up. This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up. Click the status to display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen. This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording. This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615. This is the total time the NBG4615 has been on. This field displays your NBG4615s present date and time. This displays what percentage of the NBG4615s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG4615 is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using bandwidth management.) This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4615 is using. This shows whether the firewall is enabled or not. This shows whether the bandwidth management is enabled or not. This shows whether UPnP is enabled or not. This shows the web configurator mode you are viewing - Expert. This displays the NBG4615 port types. The port types are: WAN, LAN and WLAN. For the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up

(line is up or connected). For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled. For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if youre using Ethernet encapsulation. This field displays N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled. 76 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 9 Router Mode Table 27 Status Screen: Router Mode (continued) LABEL BW MGMT Monitor DHCP Table Packet Statistics WLAN Station Status DESCRIPTION Click Details... to go to the Monitor > BW MGMT Monitor screen

(Section 6.4 on page 55). Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using. Click Details... to go to the Monitor > DHCP Table screen (Section 6.5 on page 56). Use this screen to view current DHCP client information. Click Details... to go to the Monitor > Packet Statistics screen

(Section 6.6 on page 57). Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. Click Details... to go to the Monitor > WLAN Station Status screen

(Section 6.7 on page 58). Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615. 9.2.1 Navigation Panel Use the sub-menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG4615 features. Figure 47 Navigation Panel: Router Mode The following table describes the sub-menus. Table 28 Navigation Panel: Router Mode LINK Status TAB FUNCTION This screen shows the NBG4615s general device, system and interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard, and summary statistics tables. MONITOR Log NBG4615 Users Guide Use this screen to view the list of activities recorded by your NBG4615. 77 Chapter 9 Router Mode Table 28 Navigation Panel: Router Mode (continued) LINK BW MGMT TAB DHCP Table Packet Statistics WLAN Station Status CONFIGURATION Network Wireless LAN General Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS IPv6 Internet Connection Advanced IGMP Snooping IP IP Alias General Advanced IPv6 WAN LAN DHCP Server FUNCTION Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using. Use this screen to view current DHCP client information. Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615. Use this screen to configure wireless LAN. Use this screen to configure the level of wireless security for the NBG4615. Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG4615 to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG4615. This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings. Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service (WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services. Use this screen to configure WPS. Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS. Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled. Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System

(WDS) on your NBG4615. Use this screen to set the IPv6 settings for your NBG4615. This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, DNS servers and the WAN MAC address. Use this screen to configure other advanced properties. Use this screen to enable IGMP snooping if you have LAN users that subscribe to multicast services. Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask. Use this screen to have the NBG4615 apply IP alias to create LAN subnets. Use this screen to enable the NBG4615s DHCP server. Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server. 78 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 9 Router Mode Table 28 Navigation Panel: Router Mode (continued) LINK TAB General Application Advanced General IP Static Route RIP General Services Content Filter NAT DDNS Static Route RIP Security Firewall Content Filter Management Bandwidth Manageme nt General Advanced Monitor WWW Remote Manageme nt UPnP FUNCTION Use this screen to enable NAT. Use this screen to configure servers behind the NBG4615. Use this screen to change your NBG4615s port triggering settings. Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS. Use this screen to configure IP static routes. Use this screen to enable RIPv1 or RIPv2, which are LAN broadcast protocols. Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall. This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you to edit/add a firewall rule. Use this screen to block certain web features and sites containing certain keywords in the URL. Use this screen to enable bandwidth management. Use this screen to set the upstream bandwidth and edit a bandwidth management rule. Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using. Use this screen to be able to access the NBG4615 from the LAN, WAN or both. General Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG4615. MAINTENANCE General General Password Time Firmware Upgrade Backup/

Restore Reset/

Restart Sys OP Mode Password Setup Time Setting Firmware Upgrade Backup/

Restore Restart Sys OP Mode Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names. Use this screen to change the password of your NBG4615. Use this screen to change your NBG4615s time and date. Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4615. Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG4615. This screen allows you to reboot the NBG4615 without turning the power off. This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a Router or a Access Point. NBG4615 Users Guide 79 Chapter 9 Router Mode 80 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 10 Access Point Mode 10.1 Overview Use your NBG4615 as an access point (AP) if you already have a router or gateway on your network. In this mode your NBG4615 bridges a wired network

(LAN) and wireless LAN (WLAN) in the same subnet. See the figure below for an example. Figure 48 Wireless Internet Access in Access Point Mode Many screens that are available in Router mode are not available in Access Point mode, such as bandwidth management and firewall. Note: See Chapter 13 on page 111 for an example of setting up a wireless network in Access Point mode. 10.2 What You Can Do Use the Status screen to view read-only information about your NBG4615

(Section 10.4 on page 84). Use the LAN screen to set the IP address for your NBG4615 acting as an access point (Section 10.5 on page 86). NBG4615 Users Guide 81 Chapter 10 Access Point Mode 10.3 What You Need to Know See Chapter 13 on page 111 for a tutorial on setting up a network with the NBG4615 as an access point. 10.3.1 Setting your NBG4615 to AP Mode 1 2 Log into the Web Configurator if you havent already. See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this. To use your NBG4615 as an access point, go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode >

General and select Access Point mode. Figure 49 Changing to Access Point mode Note: You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes.As soon as you do, your NBG4615 is already in Access Point mode. 3 When you select Access Point Mode, the following pop-up message window appears. Figure 50 Pop up for Access Point mode Click OK. The Web Configurator refreshes once the change to Access Point mode is successful. 82 NBG4615 Users Guide 10.3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator in Access Point Mode Log in to the Web Configurator in Access Point mode, do the following:

Chapter 10 Access Point Mode 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615. 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192.168.1.2. In this case, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. 3 Click Start > Run on your computer in Windows. Type cmd in the dialog box. Enter ipconfig to show your computers IP address. If your computers IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix D on page 277 for information on changing your computers IP address. 4 After youve set your computers IP address, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type 192.168.1.2 as the web address in your web browser. Note: After clicking Login, the Easy mode appears. Refer to Section on page 61 for the Easy mode screens. Change to Expert mode to see the screens described in the sections following this. 10.3.3 Configuring your WLAN, Bandwidth Management and Maintenance Settings The configuration of wireless, bandwidth management and maintenance settings in Access Point mode is the same as for Router Mode. See Chapter 14 on page 129 for information on the configuring your wireless network. See Chapter 25 on page 205 for information on configuring your Bandwidth Management screen. See Chapter 28 on page 225 for information on configuring your Maintenance settings. NBG4615 Users Guide 83 Chapter 10 Access Point Mode 10.4 AP Mode Status Screen Click to open the Status screen. Figure 51 Status Screen: Access Point Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen. Table 29 Status Screen: Access Point Mode LABEL Logout Device Information Host Name DESCRIPTION Click this at any time to exit the Web Configurator. Firmware Version Sys OP Mode LAN Information

- MAC Address

- IP Address

- IP Subnet Mask

- DHCP 84 This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > General screen. It is for identification purposes. This is the firmware version and the date created. This is the device mode (Section 7.1.2 on page 59) to which the NBG4615 is set - Access Point Mode. This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the LAN ports IP address. This shows the LAN ports subnet mask. This shows the LAN ports DHCP role - Client or None. NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 10 Access Point Mode Table 29 Status Screen: Access Point Mode (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION WLAN Information

- WLAN OP Mode

- MAC Address

- Status

- Name (SSID)

- Channel

- Operating Channel

- Security Mode

- 802.11 Mode

- WPS System Status Item Data System Up Time Current Date/Time System Resource

- CPU Usage

- Memory Usage System Setting

- Configuration Mode Interface Status Interface Status This is the device mode (Section 7.1.2 on page 59) to which the NBG4615s wireless LAN is set - Access Point Mode. This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN - ON or OFF. This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4615 in the wireless LAN. This shows the channel number which you select manually. This shows the channel number which the NBG4615 is currently using over the wireless LAN. This shows the level of wireless security the NBG4615 is using. This shows the wireless standard. This displays Configured when the WPS has been set up. This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up. Click the status to display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen. This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording. This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615. This is the total time the NBG4615 has been on. This field displays your NBG4615s present date and time. This displays what percentage of the NBG4615s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG4615 is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using bandwidth management. This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4615 is using. This shows the web configurator mode you are viewing - Expert. This displays the NBG4615 port types. The port types are: LAN and WLAN. For the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up

(line is up or connected). For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled. NBG4615 Users Guide 85 Chapter 10 Access Point Mode Table 29 Status Screen: Access Point Mode (continued) LABEL Rate DESCRIPTION For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if youre using Ethernet encapsulation. This field displays N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled. Click Details... to go to the Monitor > Packet Statistics screen

(Section 6.6 on page 57). Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. Click Details... to go to the Monitor > WLAN Station Status screen

(Section 6.7 on page 58). Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615. Summary Packet Statistics WLAN Station Status 10.4.0.1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG4615 features in Access Point mode. The following screen and table show the features you can configure in Access Point mode. Figure 52 Menu: Access Point Mode Refer to Table 28 on page 77 for descriptions of the labels shown in the Navigation panel. 10.5 LAN Screen Use this section to configure your LAN settings while in Access Point mode. Click Network > LAN to see the screen below. 86 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 10 Access Point Mode Note: If you change the IP address of the NBG4615 in the screen below, you will need to log into the NBG4615 again using the new IP address. Figure 53 Network > LAN > IP The table below describes the labels in the screen. Table 30 Network > LAN > IP LABEL Get from DHCP Server DESCRIPTION Click this to deploy the NBG4615 as an access point in the network. When you enable this, the NBG4615 gets its IP address from the networks DHCP server (for example, your ISP). Users connected to the NBG4615 can now access the network (i.e., the Internet if the IP address is given by the ISP). The Web Configurator may no longer be accessible unless you know the IP address assigned by the DHCP server to the NBG4615. You need to reset the NBG4615 to be able to access the Web Configurator again (see Section 28.7 on page 231 for details on how to reset the NBG4615). Also when you select this, you cannot enter an IP address for your NBG4615 in the field below. Click this if you want to specify the IP address of your NBG4615. Or if your ISP or network administrator gave you a static IP address to access the network or the Internet. Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation. The default setting is 192.168.1.2. If you change the IP address you will have to log in again with the new IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG4615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615. Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP or network administrator gave you one) in this field. Use Defined LAN IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address DNS Assignment NBG4615 Users Guide 87 Chapter 10 Access Point Mode Table 30 Network > LAN > IP (continued) LABEL First DNS Server DESCRIPTION Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG4615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Second DNS Server Apply Cancel 88 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Universal Repeater Mode 11.1 Overview In universal repeater mode, your NBG4615 can act as an access point and wireless client at the same time. The NBG4615 can connect to an existing network through another access point and also lets wireless clients connect to the network through it. This helps you expand wireless coverage when you have an access point or wireless router already in your network. In the example below, the NBG4615 (A) is configured as a universal repeater. It has three clients that want to connect to the Internet. The NBG4615 wirelessly connects to the available access point (B). Figure 54 Universal Repeater Mode A B After the NBG4615 and the access point connect, the NBG4615 acquires its IP address from the access point. The clients of the NBG4615 can now surf the Internet. 11.2 What You Can Do Use the Status screen to view read-only information about your NBG4615

(Section 11.5 on page 92). Use the LAN screen to set the IP address for your NBG4615 acting as an access point (Section 10.5 on page 86). Use the Universal Repeater screen to configure the security between the NBG4615 and another access point (Section 11.6 on page 94). NBG4615 Users Guide 89 Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode Use other Wireless LAN screens to configure the wireless settings and wireless security between the wireless clients and the NBG4615. 11.3 What You Need to Know With the exception of the Wireless LAN > AP Client screen, other configuration screens in Universal Repeater mode are similar to the ones in Access Point Mode. See Chapter 14 on page 129 through Chapter 28 on page 236 of this Users Guide. 11.4 Setting your NBG4615 to Universal Repeater Mode 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615. 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192.168.1.2. In this case, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. 3 Click Start > Run on your computer in Windows. Type cmd in the dialog box. Enter ipconfig to show your computers IP address. If your computers IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix C on page 163 for information on changing your computers IP address. 4 After youve set your computers IP address, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type http://192.168.1.2 as the web address in your web browser. 5 Enter 1234 (default) as the password and click Login. 6 7 Type a new password and retype it to confirm, then click Apply. Otherwise, click Ignore. The Easy mode appears. Click Expert Mode in the navigation panel. 90 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode 8 To set your NBG4615 to Universal Repeater Mode, on the left of the screen, click Maintenance > Sys OP Mode and select Universal Repeater Mode. Figure 55 Changing to Universal Repeater mode Note: You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes. As soon as you do, your NBG4615 is already in Universal Repeater mode. Note: The Universal Repeater mode IP address is always the same as the Access Point mode IP address. If you changed the IP address of your NBG4615 while in Access Point mode, use this IP address in Universal Repeater mode. 9 When you select Universal Repeater Mode, the following pop-up message window appears. Figure 56 Pop up for Universal Repeater mode Click OK. The Web Configurator refreshes once the change to Universal Repeater mode is successful. NBG4615 Users Guide 91 Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode 11.5 Universal Repeater Mode Status Screen Click to open the status screen. Figure 57 Status: Universal Repeater Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen. Table 31 Status Screen: Universal Repeater Mode LABEL Logout Device Information Host Name DESCRIPTION Click this at any time to exit the Web Configurator. Firmware Version Sys OP Mode LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP 92 This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > General screen. It is for identification purposes. This is the firmware version and the date created. This is the device mode (Section 7.1.2 on page 59) to which the NBG4615 is set - Universal Repeater Mode. This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the LAN ports IP address. This shows the LAN ports subnet mask. This shows the LAN ports DHCP role - Client or None. NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode Table 31 Status Screen: Universal Repeater Mode (continued) LABEL WLAN Information WLAN OP Mode DESCRIPTION MAC Address Status Name (SSID) Channel Operating Channel Security Mode 802.11 Mode WLAN Station Status WPS Interface Status Interface Status Rate System Status Item Data System Up Time Current Date/Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage NBG4615 Users Guide This is the device mode (Section 7.1.2 on page 59) to which the NBG4615s wireless LAN is set - Universal Repeater Mode. This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN - ON. This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4615 in the wireless LAN. This shows the channel number which you select manually or the NBG4615 automatically scans and selects. This shows the channel number which the NBG4615 is currently using over the wireless LAN. This shows the level of wireless security the NBG4615 is using. This shows the wireless standard. If the NBG4615 has successfully connected to an AP or wireless router, it displays the SSID and MAC address of the AP or wireless router in this field. This displays Configured when the WPS has been set up. This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up. Click the status to display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen. This displays the NBG4615 port types. The port types are: LAN and WLAN. For the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up

(line is up or connected). For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled. For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed or N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled. This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording. This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615. This is the total time the NBG4615 has been on. This field displays your NBG4615s present date and time. This displays what percentage of the NBG4615s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG4615 is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using bandwidth management. This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4615 is using. 93 Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode Table 31 Status Screen: Universal Repeater Mode (continued) LABEL System Setting DESCRIPTION Configuration Mode This shows the web configurator mode you are viewing - Expert. Summary Packet Statistics WLAN Station Status Click Details... to go to the Monitor > Packet Statistics screen

(Section 6.6 on page 57). Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. Click Details... to go to the Monitor > WLAN Station Status screen

(Section 6.7 on page 58). Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615. 11.5.0.1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG4615 features in Universal Repeater mode. The following screen and table show the features you can configure in Universal Repeater mode. Figure 58 Menu: Universal Repeater Mode Refer to Table 28 on page 77 for descriptions of the labels shown in the Navigation panel. 11.6 Universal Repeater Screen Use this screen to enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode used by the wireless device to which you want to connect. Go to Configuration >

Wireless LAN > Universal Repeater to open the Universal Repeater screen. The screen varies depending on security mode. 94 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode Note: To have wireless clients access or acquire an IP address from another access point or wireless router (B) through the NBG4615 (A) in universal repeater mode, you must set the channel number in the Wireless LAN > General screen to be the same as the one on the wireless router or AP to which the NBG4615 wants to connect. B A 11.6.1 No Security Figure 59 Universal Repeater Mode: Wireless LAN > Universal Repeater: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Universal Repeater Mode: Wireless LAN > Universal Repeater: No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Universal Repeater Parameters Enable Select this option to have the NBG4615 connect to the specified access point. Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting. Enter the MAC address of the access point to which you are connecting. SSID MAC Address

(Optional) Security Mode Select No Security if the access point to which you want to connect Apply Cancel does not use encryption. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. NBG4615 Users Guide 95 Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode 11.6.2 Static WEP Figure 60 Universal Repeater Mode: Wireless LAN > Universal Repeater: Static WEP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Universal Repeater Mode: Wireless LAN > Universal Repeater: Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Universal Repeater Parameters Enable Select this option to have the NBG4615 connect to the specified access point. Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting. Enter the MAC address of the access point to which you are connecting. SSID MAC Address

(Optional) Security Mode Select Static WEP if the access point to which you want to connect uses WEP data encryption. Select Open or Shared Key from the drop-down list box. This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to log into the wireless network. Keep this setting at Open unless you want to force a key verification before communication between the wireless client and the NBG4615 occurs. Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key prior to communication. Select a default WEP key to use for data encryption. Encryption Type WEP Key Title WEPKey Default 96 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode Table 33 Universal Repeater Mode: Wireless LAN > Universal Repeater: Static WEP

(continued) LABEL WEP Key 1 ~

WEP Key 4 DESCRIPTION The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG4615 and the access point must use the same WEP key for data transmission. If you chose HEX, enter 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters in the range of

"A-F", "a-f" and "0-9" (for example, 11AA22BB33) for a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP key respectively. If you chose ASCII, enter any 5 or 13 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from "a-z", "A-Z" and "0-9" (for example, MyKey) for a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP key respectively. You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Apply Cancel 11.6.3 WPA(2)-PSK Figure 61 Universal Repeater Mode: Wireless LAN > Universal Repeater: WPA(2)-

PSK The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Universal Repeater Mode: Wireless LAN > Universal Repeater: WPA(2)-

PSK DESCRIPTION LABEL Universal Repeater Parameters Enable Select this option to have the NBG4615 connect to the specified access point. Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting. Enter the MAC address of the access point to which you are connecting. SSID MAC Address

(Optional) Security Mode Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK if the access point to which you want to connect uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK. NBG4615 Users Guide 97 Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode Table 34 Universal Repeater Mode: Wireless LAN > Universal Repeater: WPA(2)-

PSK (continued) LABEL Encryption Type Pre-Shared Key DESCRIPTION Select the type of wireless encryption employed by the access point to which you want to connect. WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password for authentication. Type the password employed by the access point to which you want to connect. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Apply Reset 98 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 12 WISP Mode 12.1 Overview Your NBG4615 can act as a wireless client. In wireless client mode, it can connect to an existing network via an access point. Use this mode if you already have an access point or router in your network. In the example below, one NBG4615 (A) is configured as a wireless client and another is used as an access point (B). The wireless client has two clients that need to connect to the Internet. The NBG4615 wirelessly connects to the available access point (B). Figure 62 Wireless Client Mode WISP built-in firewall Access Point After the NBG4615 and the access point connect, the NBG4615 acquires its WAN IP address from the access point. The clients of the NBG4615 can now surf the Internet. 12.2 What You Can Do Use the Status screen to view read-only information about your NBG4615

(Section 12.4 on page 101). Use the LAN screen to set the IP address for your NBG4615 acting as an access point (Section 10.5 on page 86). Use the Wireless LAN screen to associate your NBG4615 (acting as a wireless client) with an existing access point (Section 12.5 on page 104). NBG4615 Users Guide 99 Chapter 12 WISP Mode 12.3 What You Need to Know With the exception of the Wireless LAN screen, the Monitor, Configuration and Maintenance screens in WISP mode are similar to the ones in Router mode. See Chapter 14 on page 129 through Chapter 28 on page 236 of this Users Guide. 12.3.1 Setting your NBG4615 to WISP Mode 1 2 Log into the Web Configurator if you havent already. See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this. To set your NBG4615 to WISP Mode, go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode >

General and select WISP Mode. Figure 63 Changing to WISP mode Note: You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes.As soon as you do, your NBG4615 is already in WISP mode. 3 When you select WISP Mode, the following pop-up message window appears. Figure 64 Pop up window for WISP mode Click OK. The Web Configurator refreshes once the change to WISP mode is successful. 12.3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator in WISP Mode To login to Web Configurator in WISP Mode, do the following:

100 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615. 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192.168.1.1. If you did not change this, you can use the same IP address in WISP Mode. Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type 192.168.1.1 as the web address in your web browser. If you changed the IP address of your NBG4615 while in Router mode, use this IP address in WISP Mode. The WISP Mode IP address is always the same as the Router mode IP address. Note: After clicking Login, the Easy Mode appears. Refer to Section on page 61 for the Easy Mode screens. Click Expert mode to see the screens described in the sections following this. 12.4 WISP Mode Status Screen Click to open the status screen. Figure 65 Status: WISP Mode NBG4615 Users Guide 101 Chapter 12 WISP Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen. Table 35 Status Screen: WISP Mode DESCRIPTION LABEL Logout Click this at any time to exit the Web Configurator. Device Information Host Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > General screen. It is for identification purposes. This is the firmware version and the date created. This is the device mode (Section 7.1.2 on page 59) to which the NBG4615 is set - WISP Mode. This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the WAN ports IP address. This shows the WAN ports subnet mask. This shows the WAN ports gateway IP address. This shows the LAN ports DHCP role - Client or None. This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the LAN ports IP address. This shows the LAN ports subnet mask. This shows the LAN ports DHCP role - Server or Disable. This is the device mode (Section 7.1.2 on page 59) to which the NBG4615s wireless LAN is set - WISP Mode. This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN - ON or OFF. This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4615 in the wireless LAN. This shows whether or not the NBG4615 has successfully associated with an access point - Associated or Disassociated. This shows the level of wireless security the NBG4615 is using. This shows the wireless standard. This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording. This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615. This is the total time the NBG4615 has been on. This field displays your NBG4615s present date and time. Firmware Version Sys OP Mode WAN Information

- MAC Address

- IP Address

- IP Subnet Mask

- Default Gateway

- DHCP LAN Information

- MAC Address

- IP Address

- IP Subnet Mask

- DHCP WLAN Information

- WLAN OP Mode

- MAC Address

- Status

- Name (SSID)

- Connect Status

- Security Mode

- 802.11 Mode System Status Item Data System Up Time Current Date/Time System Resource 102 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode Table 35 Status Screen: WISP Mode (continued) LABEL

- CPU Usage

- Memory Usage System Setting

- Firewall

- Bandwidth Management

- UPnP

- Configuration Mode Interface Status Interface Status Rate Summary BW MGMT Monitor DHCP Table Packet Statistics DESCRIPTION This displays what percentage of the NBG4615s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG4615 is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using bandwidth management. This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4615 is using. This shows whether the firewall is enabled or not. This shows whether the bandwidth management is enabled or not. This shows whether UPnP is enabled or not. This shows the web configurator mode you are viewing - Expert. This displays the NBG4615 port types. The port types are: LAN and WLAN. For the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up

(line is up or connected). For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled. For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if youre using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled. Click Details... to go to the Monitor > BW MGMT Monitor screen

(Section 6.4 on page 55). Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using. Click Details... to go to the Monitor > DHCP Table screen (Section 6.5 on page 56). Use this screen to view current DHCP client information. Click Details... to go to the Monitor > Packet Statistics screen

(Section 6.6 on page 57). Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. 12.4.0.1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG4615 features in WISP mode. NBG4615 Users Guide 103 Chapter 12 WISP Mode The following screen and table show the features you can configure in Access Point mode. Figure 66 Menu: WISP Mode Refer to Table 28 on page 77 for descriptions of the labels shown in the Navigation panel. 12.5 Wireless LAN General Screen Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings of your NBG4615. Go to Configuration > Wireless LAN > General to open the following screen. Figure 67 WISP Mode: Wireless LAN > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 36 WISP Mode: Wireless LAN > General LABEL WISP Parameters SSID Channel Selection Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting. The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless devices is called a channel. The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference. 104 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode DESCRIPTION Select the security mode of the access point to which you want to connect. Table 36 WISP Mode: Wireless LAN > General (continued) LABEL Security Mode Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 12.5.0.1 No Security Use this screen if the access point to which you want to connect does not use encryption. Figure 68 No Security (WISP) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 No Security (WISP) LABEL DESCRIPTION WISP Parameters SSID Channel Selection Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting. The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless devices is called a channel. The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference. Select No Security in this field. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Security Mode Apply Cancel NBG4615 Users Guide 105 Chapter 12 WISP Mode 12.5.1 Static WEP Use this screen if the access point to which you want to connect to uses WEP security mode. Figure 69 WEP (WISP) The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 38 WEP (WISP) LABEL WISP Parameters SSID Channel Selection Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting. The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless devices is called a channel. The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference. Select Static WEP to enable data encryption. Enter a Passphrase (up to 26 printable characters) and click Generate. A passphrase functions like a password. In WEP security mode, it is further converted by the NBG4615 into a complicated string that is referred to as the key. This key is requested from all devices wishing to connect to a wireless network. Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP. This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key. Security Mode PassPhrase WEP Encryption ASCII 106 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode Table 38 WEP (WISP) (continued) LABEL Hex DESCRIPTION Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key. The preceding "0x", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered automatically. The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG4615 and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. Key 1 to Key 4 If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. The default key is key 1. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Apply Cancel 12.5.2 WPA(2)-PSK Use this screen if the access point to which you want to connect uses WPA(2)-PSK security mode. Figure 70 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (WISP) The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 39 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (WISP) LABEL WISP Parameters SSID Channel Selection Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting. The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless devices is called a channel. The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK to enable data encryption. Security Mode Encryption Type Select the type of wireless encryption employed by the access point to which you want to connect. NBG4615 Users Guide 107 Chapter 12 WISP Mode Table 39 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (WISP) (continued) LABEL Pre-Shared Key WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password for DESCRIPTION authentication. Type the pre-shared key employed by the access point to which you want to connect. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Apply Cancel 12.5.3 Site Survey Screen Use this screen to scan for and connect to a wireless network automatically. Go to Configuration > Site Survey to open the following screen. Figure 71 Configuration > Wireless LAN > Site Survey (WISP) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Configuration > Wireless LAN > Site Survey (WISP) LABEL Station Site Survey

DESCRIPTION Select a wireless device and click Add Profile to open a configuration screen where you can add the selected wireless device to a profile and then enable it. This displays the SSID of the wireless device. indicates the wireless device is added to an activated profile and the NBG4615 is connecting to it. This displays the MAC address of the wireless device. This displays the strength of the wireless signal. The signal strength mainly depends on the antenna output power and the distance between your NBG4615 and this device. This displays the channel number used by this wireless device. This displays the data encryption method used by this wireless device. This displays the authentication method used by this wireless device. SSID BSSID Signal Strength Channel station encryp station auth 108 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode Table 40 Configuration > Wireless LAN > Site Survey (WISP) (continued) LABEL Network Type Rescan DESCRIPTION This displays the network type (In (Infrastructure) or Ad (Ad Hoc) of this wireless device. Click this button to search for available wireless devices within transmission range and update this table. Select a wireless device and click this button to add it to a profile. Setting NBG4615 Users Guide 109 Chapter 12 WISP Mode 110 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 13 Tutorials 13.1 Overview This chapter provides tutorials for setting up your NBG4615. Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS Configure Wireless Security without WPS Using Multiple SSIDs on the NBG4615 Connecting the NBG4615 (in Universal Repeater Mode) to an AP or Wireless Router 13.2 Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS. This example uses the NBG4615 as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to a notebook. Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCI card). There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection. This tutorial shows you how to do both. Push Button Configuration (PBC) - create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button. See Section 13.2.1 on page 112.This is the easier method. PIN Configuration - create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client's PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the NBG4615s interface. See Section 13.2.2 on page 113. This is the more secure method, since one device can authenticate the other. NBG4615 Users Guide 111 Chapter 13 Tutorials 13.2.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your NBG4615 is turned on. Make sure the WLAN switch (at the back panel of the NBG4615) is set to ON, and that the device is placed within range of your computer. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client (this example uses the NWD210N) driver and utility in your notebook. 3 4 In the wireless client utility, find the WPS settings. Enable WPS and press the WPS button (Start or WPS button) Log into NBG4615s Web Configurator and press the Push Button in the Configuration > Network > Wireless Client > WPS Station screen. Note: Your NBG4615 has a WPS button located on its back panel, as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function;

you can use one or the other. Note: It doesnt matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. The NBG4615 sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG4615 securely. 112 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 13 Tutorials The following figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security by pressing a button on both NBG4615 and wireless client (the NWD210N in this example). Figure 72 Example WPS Process: PBC Method Wireless Client Access Point WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 13.2.2 PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both NBG4615s configuration interface and the clients utilities. 1 Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. 2 Enter the PIN number to the PIN field in the Configuration > Network >

Wireless LAN > WPS Station screen on the NBG4615. 3 Click Start buttons (or button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client utility screen and the NBG4615s WPS Station screen within two minutes. The NBG4615 authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG4615 securely. NBG4615 Users Guide 113 Chapter 13 Tutorials The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and security on NBG4615 and wireless client (ex. NWD210N in this example) by using PIN method. Figure 73 Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client Access Point WITHIN 2 MINUTES 13.3 Configure Wireless Security without WPS This example shows you how to configure wireless security settings with the following parameters on your NBG4615. SSID Channel Security SSID_Example3 6 WPA-PSK

(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey) Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG4615. The instructions require that your hardware is connected (see the Quick Start Guide) and you are logged into the Web Configurator through your LAN connection

(see Section 5.2 on page 47). 114 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 13 Tutorials 1 Make sure the WLAN switch (at the back panel of the NBG4615) is set to ON. 2 Open the Configuration > Wireless LAN > General screen in the APs Web Configurator. 3 Confirm that the status of wireless LAN is ON. 4 Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select Channel-06 as the channel. Click Apply. 5 Go to the Configuration > Network > Wireless LAN > Security screen. Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey in the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply.l NBG4615 Users Guide 115 Chapter 13 Tutorials 6 Open the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status. 13.3.1 Configure Your Notebook Note: We use the ZyXEL M-302 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for the wireless client. The screens may vary for different models. 1 The NBG4615 supports IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and IEEE 802.11n wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computers wireless adapter supports one of these standards. 2 Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a utility that you install on your computer. See your wireless adapters Users Guide for information on how to do that. 3 After youve installed the utility, open it. If you cannot see your utilitys icon on your screen, go to Start > Programs and click on your utility in the list of programs that appears. The utility displays a list of APs within range, as shown in the example screen below. 116 NBG4615 Users Guide 4 Select SSID_Example3 and click Connect. Chapter 13 Tutorials 5 Select WPA-PSK and type the security key in the following screen. Click Next. 6 The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue. NBG4615 Users Guide 117 Chapter 13 Tutorials 7 Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below. If your wireless connection is weak or you have no connection, see the Troubleshooting section of this Users Guide. If your connection is successful, open your Internet browser and enter http://

www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured. 13.4 Using Multiple SSIDs on the NBG4615 You can configure more than one SSID on a NBG4615 when it is operating in access point or universal repeater mode. This allows you to configure multiple independent wireless networks on the NBG4615 as if there were multiple APs

(virtual APs). Each virtual AP has its own SSID, wireless security type and MAC filtering settings. That is, each SSID on the NBG4615 represents a different access point/wireless network to wireless clients in the network. Clients can associate only with the SSIDs for which they have the correct security settings. Clients using different SSIDs can access the Internet and the wired network behind the NBG4615 (such as a printer). You can allow communication between wireless clients of different SSIDs in the Network > Wireless LAN > General screen. See Section 14.2 on page 133 for more information. 118 NBG4615 Users Guide For example, you may set up three wireless networks (A, B and C) in your office. A is for workers, B is for guests and C is specific to a VoIP device in the meeting room. Chapter 13 Tutorials A SSID_Worker C SSID_VoIP B SSID_Guest 13.4.1 Configuring Security Settings of Multiple SSIDs The NBG4615 is in access point mode by default. If you want to use multiple SSIDs when the NBG4615 is in universal repeater mode, see Chapter 8 on page 81 for how to set the NBG4615 to universal repeater mode. This example shows you how to configure the SSIDs with the following parameters on your NBG4615 (in access point mode). SSID SSID_Worker WPA2-PSK SECURITY TYPE SSID_Guest SSID_VoIP WPA Compatible Static WEP 128bit WPA-PSK KEY DoNotStealMyWireless Network MAC FILTERING Disable keyexample123 VoIPOnly12345678 Disable Allow 00:A0:C5:01:23:45 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615 using an Ethernet cable. 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192.168.1.2. In this case, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. NBG4615 Users Guide 119 Chapter 13 Tutorials 3 Click Start > Run on your computer in Windows. Type cmd in the dialog box. Enter ipconfig to show your computers IP address. If your computers IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix C on page 163 for information on changing your computers IP address. 4 After youve set your computers IP address, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type http://192.168.1.2 as the web address in your web browser. 5 Enter 1234 (default) as the password and click Login. 6 7 Type a new password and retype it to confirm, then click Apply. Otherwise, click Ignore. The Easy mode appears. Click Expert Mode in the navigation panel. 8 Go to Configuration > Network > Wireless LAN > General. Configure the screen as follows. In this example, you select Enable Intra-BSS Traffic for SSID_Worker and SSID_Guest to allow wireless clients in the same wireless network to communicate with each other. Click Apply. 120 NBG4615 Users Guide 9 Click the Security tab to configure security settings for each SSID. Select SSID_Worker from the SSID drop-down list. Configure the screen as follows. Click Apply. Chapter 13 Tutorials 10 Select SSID_Guest from the SSID drop-down list. Configure the screen as follows. Click Apply. NBG4615 Users Guide 121 Chapter 13 Tutorials 11 Select SSID_VoIP from the SSID drop-down list. Configure the screen as follows. Click Apply. 12 Click the MAC Filter tab to configure MAC filtering for the SSID_VoIP wireless network. Select SSID_VoIP from the SSID drop-down list and select Allow in the Policy field. Enter the VoIP devices MAC address in the Add a station Mac Address field and click Apply to allow only the VoIP device to associate with the NBG4615 using this SSID. 13.5 Connecting the NBG4615 (in Universal Repeater Mode) to an AP or Wireless Router If you have an access point or wireless router with Internet access deployed in your network already, and you want to have wireless clients connect to the existing AP or wireless router through the NBG4615, set the NBG4615 to 122 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 13 Tutorials Universal Repeater mode and then associate the NBG4615 with the AP or wireless router. The NBG4615 must be within the transmission range of the AP or wireless router. 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615 using an Ethernet cable. 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192.168.1.2. In this case, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. 3 Click Start > Run on your computer in Windows. Type cmd in the dialog box. Enter ipconfig to show your computers IP address. If your computers IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix C on page 163 for information on changing your computers IP address. 4 After youve set your computers IP address, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type http://192.168.1.2 as the web address in your web browser. 5 Enter 1234 (default) as the password and click Login. 6 7 Type a new password and retype it to confirm, then click Apply. Otherwise, click Ignore. The Easy mode appears. Click Expert Mode in the navigation panel. 8 On the left of the screen, click Maintenance > Sys OP Mode and select Universal Repeater Mode. Click Apply. The NBG4615 restarts. 9 Enter the password and click Login to access the web configurator again. Click Expert Mode. NBG4615 Users Guide 123 Chapter 13 Tutorials 10 Go to Configuration > Network > Wireless LAN > Universal Repeater to connect the NBG4615 wirelessly to an AP. Select Enable. Enter the SSID of the existing AP or wireless router to which you want to connect (SSIDofMyAP in this example). Enter the wireless security settings which are the same as those on the existing AP or wireless router to access it (WPA-PSK and KeyofMyWirelessNetwork in this example). Click Apply. 11 Set the channel number in the Wireless LAN > General screen to be the same as the one on the wireless router or AP to which the NBG4615 is connecting. This allows wireless clients access or acquire an IP address from another AP or wireless router through the NBG4615 in universal repeater mode. 124 NBG4615 Users Guide 12 Go to the Status screen. If the NBG4615 has successfully connected to an AP or wireless router, it displays the SSID and MAC address of the AP or wireless router in the field next to WLAN Station Status under Device Information. Chapter 13 Tutorials To check whether a wireless client is currently connecting to the NBG4615, click the WLAN Station Status (Details...) hyperlink under Summary in the Status screen or Monitor > WLAN Station Status. See Section 9.5 on page 94 for more information. NBG4615 Users Guide 125 Chapter 13 Tutorials 126 NBG4615 Users Guide PART II Technical Reference 127 128

CHAPTER 14 Wireless LAN 14.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NBG4615. See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 74 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your NBG4615 is the AP. NBG4615 Users Guide 129 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN 14.1.1 What You Can Do Use the General screen to enter the SSID, enable intra-BSS traffic and select the channel. (Section 14.2 on page 133). Use the Security screen to configure wireless security between the NBG4615 and the wireless clients. Use the MAC Filter screen to allow or deny wireless stations based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the NBG4615 (Section 14.4 on page 139). Use the Advanced screen to allow intra-BSS networking and set the RTS/CTS Threshold (Section 14.5 on page 140). Use the QoS screen to ensure Quality of Service (QoS) in your wireless network

(Section 14.6 on page 141). Use the WPS screen to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually (Section 14.7 on page 142). Use the WPS Station screen to add a wireless station using WPS (Section 14.8 on page 143). Use the Scheduling screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off (Section 14.9 on page 144). Use the WDS screen to configure Wireless Distribution System on your NBG4615 (Section 14.10 on page 146). 14.1.2 What You Should Know Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 130 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 14 Wireless LAN SSID Normally, the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. MAC Address Filter Every wireless client has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each wireless client, see the appropriate Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct settings (SSID, channel, and security). If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct settings. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. User Authentication You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. This is called user authentication. However, every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user. In the AP: this feature is called a local user database or a local database. In a RADIUS server: this is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. NBG4615 Users Guide 131 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section. Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication. (See page 131 for information about this.) Table 41 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest Strongest NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER No Security Static WEP WPA-PSK WPA2-PSK WPA2 WPA For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose the AP does not have a local user database, and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no user authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. IEEE 802.1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. Note: It is not possible to use WPA-PSK, WPA or stronger encryption with a local user database. In this case, it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your NBG4615, you can also select an option (WPA Compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or 132 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 14 Wireless LAN WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA Compatible option in the NBG4615. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key. WPS WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Depending on the devices in your network, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the devices. Then, they connect and set up a secure network by themselves. See how to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 13.2 on page 111. WDS Wireless Distribution System or WDS security is used between bridged APs. It is independent of the security between the wired networks and their respective APs. If you do not enable WDS security, traffic between APs is not encrypted. When WDS security is enabled, both APs must use the same pre-shared key. 14.2 General Wireless LAN Screen Use this screen to configure the SSIDs of the wireless LAN. Note: If you are configuring the NBG4615 from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the NBG4615s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG4615s new settings. NBG4615 Users Guide 133 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen. Figure 75 Network > Wireless LAN > General The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 42 Network > Wireless LAN > General LABEL Wireless LAN This shows whether the wireless LAN is ON or OFF. You can enable or DESCRIPTION Network Name(SSID) or Name(SSID1

~3) Hide SSID Enable Intra-

BSS Traffic disable the wireless LAN by using the WLAN switch located on the back panel of the NBG4615. The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless client is associated. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable characters found on a typical English language keyboard) for the wireless LAN. You can configure up to four SSIDs to enable multiple BSSs (Basic Service Sets) on the NBG4615. This allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying security types to different SSIDs. Wireless clients can use different SSIDs to associate with the same access point. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-

BSS is enabled, wireless clients can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless clients can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. 134 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Table 42 Network > Wireless LAN > General (continued) LABEL Channel Selection DESCRIPTION Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region. Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in. Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels. This option is only available if Auto Channel Selection is disabled. Select this check box for the NBG4615 to automatically choose the channel with the least interference. Deselect this check box if you wish to manually select the channel using the Channel Section field. This displays the channel the NBG4615 is currently using. Select the check box to allow communication between wireless clients of different SSIDs. Do not select the check box if you do not want to enable this function. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Communicati on between wireless clients with different SSIDs Apply Cancel See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen. 14.3 Wireless Security Screen Use this screen to select the wireless security mode for each SSID. Click Network

> Wireless LAN > Security to open the Security screen. The screen varies depending on what you select in the Security Mode field. 14.3.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless clients to communicate with the access points without any data encryption. NBG4615 Users Guide 135 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG4615, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 76 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select the SSID for which you want to configure the security. Choose No Security from the drop-down list box. Table 43 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: No Security LABEL SSID Security Mode Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 14.3.2 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private. It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Your NBG4615 allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. 136 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list. Figure 77 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: Static WEP The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 44 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: Static WEP LABEL SSID Security Mode PassPhrase DESCRIPTION Select the SSID for which you want to configure the security. Select Static WEP to enable data encryption. Enter a Passphrase (up to 26 printable characters) and click Generate. WEP Encryption Authentication Method A passphrase functions like a password. In WEP security mode, it is further converted by the NBG4615 into a complicated string that is referred to as the key. This key is requested from all devices wishing to connect to a wireless network. Select 64-bits or 128-bits. This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. Select Auto or Shared Key from the drop-down list box. This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to login to the wireless client. Keep this setting at Auto unless you want to force a key verification before communication between the wireless client and the NBG4615 occurs. Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key prior to communication. Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key. ASCII NBG4615 Users Guide 137 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Table 44 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: Static WEP (continued) LABEL Hex DESCRIPTION Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key. The preceding "0x", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered automatically. Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG4615 and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. The default key is key 1. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Apply Cancel 14.3.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 78 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 45 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK LABEL SSID Security Mode WPA Compatible DESCRIPTION Select the SSID for which you want to configure the security. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK to enable data encryption. This field appears when you choose WPA2-PSK as the Security Mode. Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your NBG4615. 138 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Table 45 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (continued) LABEL Pre-Shared Key WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password for DESCRIPTION authentication. Group Key Update Timer Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive keyboard characters. The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP sends a new group key out to all clients. Apply Cancel The default is 3600 seconds (60 minutes). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 14.4 MAC Filter The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG4615 to give exclusive access to devices (Allow) or exclude devices from accessing the NBG4615 (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen. To change your NBG4615s MAC filter settings, click Network > Wireless LAN >

MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 79 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 46 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter LABEL Access Policy SSID DESCRIPTION Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filtering. NBG4615 Users Guide 139 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Table 46 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter (continued) LABEL Policy DESCRIPTION Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Disable to deactivate the MAC filtering rule you configure below. Select Allow to permit access to the NBG4615, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NBG4615. Add a station Mac Address Select Reject to block access to the NBG4615, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG4615 Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the NBG4615 in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Click Add. MAC Filter Summary Delete MAC Address Apply Cancel Click the delete icon to remove the MAC address from the list. This is the MAC address of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the NBG4615. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 14.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen Use this screen to allow wireless advanced features, such as the output power, RTS/CTS Threshold and high-throughput physical mode settings. Click Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Figure 80 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced 140 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 14 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced LABEL RTS/CTS Threshold DESCRIPTION Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS

(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake. Fragmentation Threshold Output Power Enter a value between 256 and 2432. The threshold (number of bytes) for the fragmentation boundary for directed messages. It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter an even number between 256 and 2346. Set the output power of the NBG4615 in this field. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the NBG4615 to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following 100%, 90%, 75%, 50%, 25% or 10%. See the product specifications for more information on your NBG4615s output power. HT (High Throughput) Physical Mode - Use the fields below to configure the 802.11 wireless environment of your NBG4615. Operating Mode Choose this according to the wireless mode(s) used in your network. Mixed - Select this if the wireless clients in your network use different wireless modes (for example, IEEE 802.11b/g and IEEE 802.1n modes) Channel Bandwidth Green - Select this if the wireless clients in your network uses only one type of wireless mode (for example, IEEEE 802.11 n only) Select the channel bandwidth you want to use for your wireless network. It is recommended that you select 20/40 (20/40 MHz). Select 20 MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood. Guard Interval Select Auto to increase data throughput. However, this may make data transfer more prone to errors. Select Long to prioritize data integrity. This may be because your wireless network is busy and congested or the NBG4615 is located in an environment prone to radio interference. This is set to Auto by default. If you select 20/40 as your Channel Bandwidth, the extension channel enables the NBG4615 to get higher data throughput. This also lowers radio interference and traffic. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Extension Channel Apply Cancel 14.6 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service (such as VoIP and video) a priority level. NBG4615 Users Guide 141 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Click Network > Wireless LAN > QoS. The following screen appears. Figure 81 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS LABEL Enable WMM QoS DESCRIPTION Check this to have the NBG4615 automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Apply Cancel 14.7 WPS Screen Use this screen to enable/disable WPS, view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS status. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN >

WPS tab. Note: With WPS, wireless clients can only connect to the wireless network using the first SSID on the NBG4615. Figure 82 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS 142 NBG4615 Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 14 Wireless LAN DESCRIPTION Table 49 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS LABEL WPS Setup Enable WPS PIN Number Select this to enable the WPS feature. This displays a PIN number last time system generated. Click Generate to generate a new PIN number. Status Status Release Configuration 802.11 Mode SSID Security Apply Cancel This displays Configured when the NBG4615 has connected to a wireless network using WPS or when Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there are no wireless or wireless security changes on the NBG4615 or you click Release_Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. This button is only available when the WPS status displays Configured. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the NBG4615. This is the 802.11 mode used. Only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the NBG4615. This is the name of the wireless network (the NBG4615s first SSID). This is the type of wireless security employed by the network. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 14.8 WPS Station Screen Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station tab. NBG4615 Users Guide 143 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Note: After you click Push Button on this screen, you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless station, you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes. Figure 83 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 50 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station LABEL Push Button DESCRIPTION Use this button when you use the PBC (Push Button Configuration) method to configure wireless stationss wireless settings. See Section 4.3.1 on page 32. Click this to start WPS-aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security information synchronization. Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to configure wireless stations wireless settings. See Section 4.3.2 on page 33. Or input stations PIN number Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless stations utility. Then click Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization. 14.9 Scheduling Screen Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default. The wireless LAN can be scheduled to turn 144 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 14 Wireless LAN on or off on certain days and at certain times. To open this screen, click Network

> Wireless LAN > Scheduling tab. Figure 84 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 51 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling LABEL Wireless LAN Scheduling Enable Wireless LAN Scheduling Scheduling WLAN Status Select this to enable Wireless LAN scheduling. Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off. This field works in conjunction with the Day and For the following times fields. Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off. If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days. This field works in conjunction with the For the following times field. Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute (min) drop down boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute (min) drop down boxes. If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields. If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Day For the following times

(24-Hour Format) Apply Cancel NBG4615 Users Guide 145 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN 14.10 WDS Screen A Wireless Distribution System (WDS) is a wireless connection between two or more APs. Use this screen to set the operating mode of your NBG4615 to AP +

Bridge or Bridge and establish wireless links with other APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device, which also must be in bridge mode. Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the NBG4615 and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. Click Network > Wireless LAN > WDS tab. The following screen opens with the Basic Setting set to Disabled, and Security Mode set to No Security. Figure 85 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS LABEL WDS Setup Basic Settings DESCRIPTION Select the operating mode for your NBG4615. Disable - The NBG4615 works as an access point only and cannot establish wireless links with other APs. AP + Bridge - The NBG4615 functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously. Bridge - The NBG4615 acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device, which also must be in bridge mode. The NBG4615 can establish up to five wireless links with other APs. This is the MAC address of your NBG4615. NBG4615 Users Guide Local MAC Address 146 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN Table 52 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS (continued) LABEL Phy Mode DESCRIPTION Select the Phy mode you want the NBG4615 to use. This dictates the maximum size of packets during data transmission. This field is not available when you select Disable in the Basic Setting field. This is the MAC address of the peer device that your NBG4615 wants to make a bridge connection with. You can connect to up to 4 peer devices. Select whether to use WEP, TKIP or AES encryption for your WDS connection in this field. Otherwise, select No Security. The Encryp Key is used to encrypt data. Peers must use the same key for data transmission. Click Apply to save your changes to NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Remote MAC Address Security EncrypType EncrypKey Apply Cancel NBG4615 Users Guide 147 Chapter 14 Wireless LAN 148 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 15 IPv6 15.1 Overview IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. See Appendix G on page 325 for more information on IPv6. 15.1.1 What You Need to Know IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits

(start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. NBG4615 Users Guide 149 Chapter 15 IPv6 15.2 The IPv6 Screen Click Network > IPv6 to open the IPv6 screen. Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings for your NBG4615. Figure 86 Network > IPv6 The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 53 Network > IPv6 LABEL IPv6 Connection Type Setup IPv6 Connection Type DESCRIPTION Select the IPv6 connection type:

Ethernet: Select this if your ISP provides you a static IPv6 address. You need to enter the IPv6 information below according to what your ISP provided. Link-local only: Use this connection mode for the NBG4615 to communicate with other IPv6 devices on the LAN side. You do not need to configure the settings below if you choose this mode. WAN IPv6 Address Setup IPv6 Address Subnet Prefix Length Gateway IP Address Enter the static IPv6 address provided by your ISP using colon (:) hexadecimal notation. Enter the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask provided by your ISP. Enter the IPv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using a colon

(:) hexadecimal notation. 150 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 15 IPv6 Table 53 Network > IPv6 (continued) LABEL First DNS Server Second DNS Server LAN IPv6 Address Setup LAN IPv6 address LAN IPv6 Link-local Address Address Autoconfiguration Setup Enable Stateless Address Autoconfiguration DESCRIPTION Enter the primary DNS server's IP address in this field. Enter the secondary DNS server's IP address in this field. Enter a valid IPv6 address for the LAN using colon (:) hexadecimal notation. This shows the IPv6 link-local address that the NBG4615 generates automatically. Select the checkbox to enable Stateless Address Autoconfiguration on the NBG4615. If this function is enabled, IP addresses are not generated by a DHCP server. They are formed by combining network prefixes with an interface identifier, which are derived from embedded IEEE Identifiers. Specify the lifetime of the router advertisement. Router advertisement is a response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters, such as IPv6 prefix and DNS information. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Router Advertisement Lifetime Apply Cancel NBG4615 Users Guide 151 Chapter 15 IPv6 152 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 16 WAN 16.1 Overview This chapter discusses the NBG4615s WAN screens. Use these screens to configure your NBG4615 for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 87 LAN and WAN 16.2 What You Can Do Use the Internet Connection screen to enter your ISP information and set how the computer acquires its IP, DNS and WAN MAC addresses (Section 16.4 on page 156). Use the Advanced screen to enable multicasting, configure Windows networking and bridge (Section 16.5 on page 166). Use IGMP Snooping screen to enable IGMP snooping in the LAN ports (Section 16.6 on page 167). NBG4615 Users Guide 153 Chapter 16 WAN 16.3 What You Need To Know The information in this section can help you configure the screens for your WAN connection, as well as enable/disable some advanced features of your NBG4615. 16.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPTP

(Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the NBG4615, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the NBG4615 to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the NBG4615 tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method). DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NBG4615 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 1 2 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the NBG4615s WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. 154 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 16 WAN WAN MAC Address The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN. Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address. Otherwise, click Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to configuration file. It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port. 16.3.2 Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Figure 88 Multicast Example In the multicast example above, systems A and D comprise one multicast group. In multicasting, the server only needs to send one data stream and this is delivered to systems A and D. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. The NBG4615 supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-

v2). At start up, the NBG4615 queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the NBG4615 periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the NBG4615 LAN and/or WAN interfaces NBG4615 Users Guide 155 Chapter 16 WAN in the Web Configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces. 16.4 Internet Connection Use this screen to change your NBG4615s Internet access settings. Click WAN from the Configuration menu. The screen differs according to the encapsulation you choose. 16.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation This screen displays when you select Ethernet encapsulation. Figure 89 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation 156 NBG4615 Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 16 WAN Table 54 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation LABEL ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation DESCRIPTION You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP

(Default) Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Bigpond Server User Name Password Retype to Confirm Use Fixed IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Select Enable if you subscribe to Internet service from BigPond in Australia. Then configure the fields below with the information provided. Type the IP address of the BigPond server. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. You can use alphanumeric and -_@$./ characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long. Type the password associated with the user name above. Use up to 64 ASCII characters except [, ] and ?. This field can be blank. Type your password again for confirmation. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field. Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field. WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG4615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-

Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-

Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG4615s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. NBG4615 Users Guide 157 Chapter 16 WAN Table 54 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation (continued) LABEL Factory default DESCRIPTION Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address Set WAN MAC Address Apply Cancel Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 16.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation The NBG4615 supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG4615 (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG4615 does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. 158 NBG4615 Users Guide This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation. Figure 90 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation Chapter 16 WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 55 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation User Name Password Retype to Confirm MTU Size Select PPP over Ethernet if you connect to your Internet via dial-up. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the user name above. Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly. Enter the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) or the largest packet size per frame that your NBG4615 can receive and process. Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. Nailed-Up Connection Idle Timeout

(sec) WAN IP Address Assignment NBG4615 Users Guide 159 Chapter 16 WAN Table 55 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation (continued) LABEL Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address DESCRIPTION Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. My WAN IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information

(and the NBG4615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the

(read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-

Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-

Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by using the NBG4615s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Clone the computers MAC address -

IP Address Set WAN MAC Address Apply Cancel Address. Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 16.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. 160 NBG4615 Users Guide This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulation. Figure 91 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation Chapter 16 WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation LABEL ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type DESCRIPTION To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the User Name above. User Name Password Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly. NBG4615 Users Guide 161 Chapter 16 WAN Table 56 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation (continued) LABEL Nailed-up Connection Idle Timeout DESCRIPTION Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the NBG4615 automatically disconnects from the PPTP server. PPTP Configuration Server IP Address Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Type the IP address of the PPTP server. Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. Your NBG4615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615. Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field. WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address Select this to get your WAN IP address from your ISP. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. My WAN IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address Factory default Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG4615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-

Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG4615s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. 162 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 16 WAN DESCRIPTION Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Table 56 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation (continued) LABEL Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address Set WAN MAC Address Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. 16.4.4 L2TP Encapsulation The Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) works at layer 2 (the data link layer) to tunnel network traffic between two peer devices over another network (like the Internet). NBG4615 Users Guide 163 Chapter 16 WAN This screen displays when you select L2TP encapsulation. Figure 92 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: L2TP Encapsulation The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: L2TP Encapsulation LABEL ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type DESCRIPTION To configure a L2TP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a layer-2 connection and the L2TP parameters for an L2TP connection. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the User Name above. User Name Password Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly. L2TP Configuration Server IP Address Type the IP address of the L2TP server. 164 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 16 WAN Table 57 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: L2TP Encapsulation (continued) LABEL Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address DESCRIPTION Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. Your NBG4615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615. Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field. WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address Select this to get your WAN IP address from your ISP. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. My WAN IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address Factory default Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address Set WAN MAC Address Apply Reset Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG4615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-

Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG4615s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. NBG4615 Users Guide 165 Chapter 16 WAN 16.5 Advanced WAN Screen Use this screen to enable Multicast and enable Auto-bridge. Note: The categories shown in this screen are independent of each other. To change your NBG4615s advanced WAN settings, click Network > WAN >

Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Figure 93 Network > WAN > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Network > WAN > Advanced LABEL Multicast Setup Multicast DESCRIPTION Select IGMPv1/v2 to enable multicasting. This applies to traffic routed from the WAN to the LAN. Select None to disable this feature. This may cause incoming traffic to be dropped or sent to all connected network devices. Auto-Subnet Configuration None Enable Auto-bridge mode Enable Auto-IP-

Change mode Select this option to have the NBG4615 do nothing when it gets a WAN IP address in the range of 192.168.x.y (where x and y are from zero to nine) or in the same subnet as the LAN IP address. Select this option to have the NBG4615 switch to bridge mode automatically when the NBG4615 gets a WAN IP address in the range of 192.168.x.y (where x and y are from zero to nine) no matter what the LAN IP address is. Select this option to have the NBG4615 change its LAN IP address to 10.0.0.1 or 192.168.1.1 accordingly when the NBG4615 gets a dynamic WAN IP address in the same subnet as the LAN IP address 192.168.1.1 or 10.0.0.1. The NAT, DHCP server and firewall functions on the NBG4615 are still available in this mode. 166 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 16 WAN Table 58 Network > WAN > Advanced (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 16.6 IGMP Snooping Screen Use this screen to enable IGMP snooping if you have LAN users that subscribe to multicast services. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Click Network > WAN > IGMP Snooping. The screen appears as shown. Figure 94 Network > WAN > IGMP Snooping The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Network > WAN > IGMP Snooping LABEL Enable IGMP Snooping DESCRIPTION Select this option to have the NBG4615 use IGMP snooping. Apply Cancel Check the LAN port/s to which IGMP snooping applies. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. NBG4615 Users Guide 167 Chapter 16 WAN 168 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 17 LAN 17.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings. A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area, usually the same building or floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server, manage IP addresses, and partition your physical network into logical networks. Figure 95 LAN Example The LAN screens can help you manage IP addresses. 17.2 What You Can Do Use the IP screen to change the IP address for your (Section 17.4 on page 171). Use the IP Alias screen to have the NBG4615 apply IP alias to create LAN subnets (Section 17.5 on page 172). NBG4615 Users Guide 169 Chapter 17 LAN 17.3 What You Need To Know The actual physical connection determines whether the NBG4615 ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 96 LAN and WAN IP Addresses The LAN parameters of the NBG4615 are preset in the factory with the following values:

IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33. These parameters should work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address(es), read the embedded Web Configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured. 17.3.1 IP Pool Setup The NBG4615 is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64. This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses

(excluding the NBG4615 itself) in the lower range (192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.32) for other server computers, for instance, servers for mail, FTP, TFTP, web, etc., that you may have. 17.3.2 LAN TCP/IP The NBG4615 has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. 170 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 17 LAN 17.3.3 IP Alias 17.4 LAN IP Screen Use this screen to change the IP address for your NBG4615. Click Network >

LAN > IP. Figure 97 Network > LAN > IP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Network > LAN > IP LABEL IP Address IP Subnet Mask DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of your NBG4615 in dotted decimal notation. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG4615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel NBG4615 Users Guide 171 Chapter 17 LAN 17.5 IP Alias Screen Use this screen to have the NBG4615 apply IP alias to create LAN subnets. Click LAN > IP Alias. Figure 98 Network > LAN > IP Alias The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 61 Network > LAN > IP Alias LABEL IP Alias IP Address IP Subnet Mask DESCRIPTION Check this to enable IP alias. Type the IP alias address of your NBG4615 in dotted decimal notation. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG4615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 172 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 18 DHCP Server 18.1 Overview DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG4615s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG4615 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. 18.1.1 What You Can Do Use the General screen to enable the DHCP server (Section 18.2 on page 174). Use the Advanced screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (Section 18.3 on page 175). 18.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. MAC Addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. NBG4615 Users Guide 173 Chapter 18 DHCP Server 18.2 General Use this screen to enable the DHCP server. Click Network > DHCP Server. The following screen displays. Figure 99 Network > DHCP Server > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 62 Network > DHCP Server > General LABEL Enable DHCP Server DESCRIPTION Select the checkbox to enable DHCP for LAN. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients (computers) to obtain TCP/IP configuration at startup from a server. Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise. Clear it to disable the NBG4615 acting as a DHCP server. When configured as a server, the NBG4615 provides TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If not, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be manually configured. When set as a server, fill in the following four fields. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool for LAN. This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool for LAN. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. IP Pool Starting Address Pool Size Apply Cancel 174 NBG4615 Users Guide 18.3 Advanced Chapter 18 DHCP Server This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NBG4615 sends to the DHCP clients. To change your NBG4615s static DHCP settings, click Network > DHCP Server

> Advanced. The following screen displays. Figure 100 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 63 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced LABEL LAN Static DHCP Table

MAC Address IP Address DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row). Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN. Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN. The NBG4615 passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The NBG4615 only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server check box. When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. NBG4615 Users Guide 175 Chapter 18 DHCP Server Table 63 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced (continued) LABEL First DNS Server DESCRIPTION Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG4615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Second DNS Server Apply Cancel Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-

Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select DNS Relay to have the NBG4615 act as a DNS proxy. The NBG4615's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-

only). The NBG4615 tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG4615 itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG4615, the NBG4615 forwards the query to the NBG4615's system DNS server (configured in the WAN > Internet Connection screen) and relays the response back to the computer. You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers; if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 176 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 19 NAT 19.1 Overview NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network. The figure below is a simple illustration of a NAT network. You want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another

(B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses to the devices (A to D) connected to your NBG4615. The ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. All traffic coming from A to D going out to the Internet use the IP address of the NBG4615, which is 192.168.1.1. Figure 101 NAT Example A: 192.168.1.33 FTP, Telnet, SNMP Ports 21 to 25 LAN WAN 192.168.1.1 B: 192.168.1.34 Port 80 C: 192.168.1.35 IP address assigned by ISP This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG4615. NBG4615 Users Guide 177 Chapter 19 NAT Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG4615. 19.1.1 What You Can Do Use the General screen to enable NAT and set a default server (Section 19.2 on page 180). Use the Application screen to change your NBG4615s port forwarding settings

(Section 19.3 on page 181). Use the Advanced screen to change your NBG4615s trigger port settings

(Section 19.5.3 on page 185). 19.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Inside/Outside This denotes where a host is located relative to the NBG4615, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/Local This denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note: Inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. An inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 64 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside Outside DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. This refers to the host on the WAN. 178 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 19 NAT Table 64 NAT Definitions (continued) ITEM Local Global DESCRIPTION This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. Note: NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers , NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your NBG4615 filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The NBG4615 keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so NBG4615 Users Guide 179 Chapter 19 NAT incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 102 How NAT Works 19.2 General Use this screen to enable NAT and set a default server. Click Network > NAT to open the General screen. Figure 103 Network > NAT > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 65 Network > NAT > General LABEL NAT Setup Enable Network Address Translation Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet). Select the check box to enable NAT. 180 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 19 NAT Table 65 Network > NAT > General (continued) LABEL Default Server Setup DESCRIPTION Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Application screen. If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the NBG4615 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the Application screen or remote management. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 19.3 Application Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded. To change your NBG4615s port forwarding settings, click Network > NAT > Application. The screen appears as shown. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address in the NAT > General screen, the NBG4615 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management. Refer to Appendix F on page 321 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Figure 104 Network > NAT > Application NBG4615 Users Guide 181 Chapter 19 NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 66 Network > NAT > Application LABEL Add Application Rule Active DESCRIPTION Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address. Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry. Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in the first field next to Service Name. Otherwise, select a predefined service in the second field next to Service Name. The predefined service name and port number(s) will display in the Service Name and Port fields. Enter the start and end port(s) to be forwarded. Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the port(s) specified in the Port field. This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry. This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled. This field displays a name to identify this rule. This field displays the port number(s). This field displays the inside IP address of the server. Service Name Port Server IP Address Application Rules Summary

Active Name Port Server IP Address Modify Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the fields under Add Application Rule. Apply Cancel Click the Remove icon to delete a rule. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 182 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 19 NAT 19.4 Advanced To change your NBG4615s trigger port settings, click Network > NAT >

Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Note: Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time. Figure 105 Network > NAT > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 67 Network > NAT > Advanced LABEL

Name DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number (read-only). Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All characters are permitted - including spaces. Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The NBG4615 forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the NBG4615 to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Incoming Port End Port Trigger Port NBG4615 Users Guide 183 Chapter 19 NAT Table 67 Network > NAT > Advanced (continued) LABEL End Port Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 19.5 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG4615 features described in this chapter. 19.5.1 NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world. Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. 19.5.2 NAT Port Forwarding Example Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP 184 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 19 NAT addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 106 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 19.5.3 Trigger Port Forwarding Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The NBG4615 records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the NBG4615's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("incoming" port), the NBG4615 forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computers connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application. NBG4615 Users Guide 185 Chapter 19 NAT 19.5.4 Trigger Port Forwarding Example The following is an example of trigger port forwarding. Figure 107 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example 1 2 3 4 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the NBG4615 to record Janes computer IP address. The NBG4615 associates Jane's computer IP address with the "incoming"

port range of 6970-7170. The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. The NBG4615 forwards the traffic to Janes computer IP address. 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The NBG4615 times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). 19.5.5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports 1 2 Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG4615 and going to the outside. If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN cant trigger it. 186 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 20 DDNS 20.1 Overview DDNS services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address. 20.1.1 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. What is DDNS?

DDNS, or Dynamic DNS, allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. DynDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. You must have a public WAN IP address. NBG4615 Users Guide 187 Chapter 20 DDNS 20.2 General To change your NBG4615s DDNS, click Network > DDNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 108 Dynamic DNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 68 Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic DNS Service Provider Host Name User Name Password Apply Cancel Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Enter a host names in the field provided. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Enter your user name. Enter the password assigned to you. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 188 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 21 Static Route 21.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG4615. Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected, and the NBG4615 has no knowledge of the networks beyond. For instance, the NBG4615 knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1. However, the NBG4615 is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn't know that there is a route through the same remote node Router 1 (via gateway Router 2). The static routes are for you to tell the NBG4615 about the networks beyond the remote nodes. Figure 109 Example of Static Routing Topology NBG4615 Users Guide 189 Chapter 21 Static Route 21.2 IP Static Route Screen Click Network > Static Route to open the IP Static Route screen. Figure 110 Network > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 69 Network > Static Route LABEL Static Routing Settings Route Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Netmask Gateway IP Address Metric Interface Add Rule Application Rules Summary No. Active Name Destination Enter a the name that describes or identifies this route. Enter the IP network address of the final destination. This is the subnet to which the routes final destination belongs. Enter the IP address of the gateway. Assign a number to identify the route. Select the interface through which the traffic is routed. Click this to add the IP static route. This is the number of an individual static route. The rules are always on and this is indicated by the icon. This is the name that describes or identifies this route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. This is the number assigned to the route. NBG4615 Users Guide Gateway Metric 190 Chapter 21 Static Route Table 69 Network > Static Route (continued) LABEL Delete DESCRIPTION Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the NBG4615. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Cancel NBG4615 Users Guide 191 Chapter 21 Static Route 192 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 22 RIP 22.1 Overview Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior or intra-domain routing protocol that uses distance-vector routing algorithms. RIP is used on the Internet and is common in the NetWare environment as a method for exchanging routing information between routers. 22.2 RIP Screen Use this screen to enable RIPv1 or RIPv2, which are LAN broadcast protocols. Click Network > RIP. The screen appears as shown. Figure 111 Network > RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 70 Network > RIP LABEL RIP DESCRIPTION Select the RIPv1 or RIPv2 you want the NBG4615 to use. Apply Cancel Otherwise select None. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. NBG4615 Users Guide 193 Chapter 22 RIP 194 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Firewall 23.1 Overview Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your NBG4615 and your LAN from unwanted or malicious traffic. Enable the firewall to protect your LAN computers from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access between the LAN and WAN. By default the firewall:

allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all of the networks. blocks traffic that originates on the other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM

(Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked

(3 and 4). Figure 112 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 23.1.1 What You Can Do Use the General screen to enable or disable the NBG4615s firewall (Section 23.2 on page 198). NBG4615 Users Guide 195 Chapter 23 Firewall Use the Services screen enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them (Section 23.3 on page 198). 23.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. What is a Firewall?

Originally, the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another. The networking term

"firewall" is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control policy between two networks. It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from a network that is not trusted. Of course, firewalls cannot solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It should never be the only mechanism or method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively, you must design and deploy it appropriately. This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information-security policy. In addition, specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself. Stateful Inspection Firewall Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules. They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also "inspect" the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols. These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency; however, they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support. Firewalls, of one type or another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises. About the NBG4615 Firewall The NBG4615s firewall feature physically separates the LAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks. It is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated (click the General tab under Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box). The NBG4615's purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The NBG4615 can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as well as log events, which may be important to the security of your network. 196 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 23 Firewall The NBG4615 is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN. The NBG4615 has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are used to physically separate the network into two areas.The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches to the broadband (cable or DSL) modem to the Internet. The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail, FTP and the World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed (by default) unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service. Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 1 Change the default password via Web Configurator. 2 3 Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way, including attaching a modem to the port. Limit who can access your router. 4 Don't enable any local service (such as NTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. 5 6 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. 7 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. NBG4615 Users Guide 197 Chapter 23 Firewall 23.2 General Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG4615s firewall, and set up firewall logs. Click Security > Firewall to open the General screen. Figure 113 Security > Firewall > General l The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 71 Security > Firewall > General LABEL Enable Firewall DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate the firewall. The NBG4615 performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated. Click Apply to save the settings. Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again. Apply Cancel 23.3 Services If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG4615, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the NBG4615 exists. Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG4615 when unsupported ports are probed. You can also use this screen to enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them. 198 NBG4615 Users Guide Click Security > Firewall > Services. The screen appears as shown next. Figure 114 Security > Firewall > Services l Chapter 23 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 72 Security > Firewall > Services LABEL LABEL ICMP DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-

reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. The NBG4615 will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Click Apply to save the settings. Select this check box to activate the firewall rules that you define (see Add Firewall Rule below). Click Apply to save the settings. Enter a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule. Respond to Ping on Apply Enable Firewall Rule Enable Firewall Rule Apply Add Firewall Rule Service Name NBG4615 Users Guide 199 Chapter 23 Firewall Table 72 Security > Firewall > Services (continued) LABEL Dest IP Address Enter the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application DESCRIPTION or service is entering. Source IP Address Protocol The NBG4615 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer. Enter the IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service. The NBG4615 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer. Select the protocol (ALL,TCP, UDP or BOTH) used to transport the packets for which you want to apply the firewall rule. Dest Port Range Enter the port number/range of the destination that define the traffic Source Port Range Add Rule Firewall Rule

Service Name Dest IP Source IP Protocol type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Enter the port number/range of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Click Add to save the firewall rule. This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn. This is a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule. This is the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application or service is entering. This is the IP address of the computer from which traffic for the application or service is initialized. This is the protocol (ALL,TCP, UDP or BOTH) used to transport the packets for which you want to apply the firewall rule. Dest Port Range This is the port number/range of the destination that define the traffic Source Port Range Action Delete Cancel type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. This is the port number/range of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Drop - Traffic matching the conditions of the firewall rule are stopped. Click Delete to remove the firewall rule. Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again. See Appendix F on page 321 for commonly used services and port numbers. 200 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 24 Content Filtering 24.1 Overview This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI. Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs. Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords. 24.1.1 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Content Filtering Profiles Content filtering allows you to block certain web features, such as cookies, and/or block access to specific web sites. For example, you can configure one policy that blocks John Does access to arts and entertainment web pages. A content filtering profile conveniently stores your custom settings for the following features. Keyword Blocking URL Checking The NBG4615 checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately when performing keyword blocking. The URLs domain name or IP address is the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/

pressroom.php, the domain name is www.zyxel.com.tw. The file path is the characters that come after the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the file path is news/pressroom.php. NBG4615 Users Guide 201 Chapter 24 Content Filtering Since the NBG4615 checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately, it will not find items that go across the two. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the NBG4615 would find tw in the domain name (www.zyxel.com.tw). It would also find news in the file path

(news/pressroom.php) but it would not find tw/news. 24.2 Content Filter Use this screen to restrict web features, add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer. Click Security > Content Filter to open the Content Filter screen. Figure 115 Security > Content Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 73 Security > Content Filter LABEL Trusted IP Setup To enable this feature, type an IP address of any one of the computers DESCRIPTION in your network that you want to have as a trusted computer. This allows the trusted computer to have full access to all features that are configured to be blocked by content filtering. Restrict Web Features Leave this field blank to have no trusted computers. Select the box(es) to restrict a feature. When you download a page containing a restricted feature, that part of the web page will appear blank or grayed out. 202 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 24 Content Filtering Table 73 Security > Content Filter (continued) LABEL Enable URL Keyword Blocking DESCRIPTION The NBG4615 can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in the domain name or IP address. For example, if the keyword "bad" was enabled, all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked, e.g., URL http://

www.website.com/bad.html would be blocked. Select this check box to enable this feature. Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 64 characters). Wildcards are not allowed. You can also enter a numerical IP address. This list displays the keywords already added. Click Add after you have typed a keyword. Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed. When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request. Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it. The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply. Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Keyword Keyword List Add Delete Clear All Apply Cancel 24.3 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG4615 features described in this chapter. 24.3.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking You can use commands to set how much of a websites URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking. See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter. Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking By default, the NBG4615 checks the URLs domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking. This means that the NBG4615 checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, content filtering only searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw. NBG4615 Users Guide 203 Chapter 24 Content Filtering Full Path URL Checking Full path URL checking has the NBG4615 check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, full path URL checking searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw/news/. Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 [disable | enable]

command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's full path. File Name URL Checking Filename URL checking has the NBG4615 check all of the characters in the URL. For example, filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php. Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 [disable | enable]

command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's complete filename. 204 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 25 Bandwidth Management 25.1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management and editing rules. ZyXELs Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application. In the figure below, uplink traffic goes from the LAN device (A) to the WAN device

(B). Bandwidth management is applied before sending the packets out to the WAN. Downlink traffic comes back from the WAN device (B) to the LAN device (A). Bandwidth management is applied before sending the traffic out to LAN. Figure 116 Bandwidth Management Example

-> VOIP

-> FTP

-> HTTP

-> Chat, Email A B You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity (bandwidth budgets) to individual applications (like VoIP, Web, FTP, and E-mail for example). 25.2 What You Can Do Use the General screen to enable bandwidth management and assign bandwidth values (Section 25.4 on page 206). Use the Advanced screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for the pre-defined services and applications (Section 25.5 on page 207). NBG4615 Users Guide 205 Chapter 25 Bandwidth Management Use the Monitor screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using (Section 25.6 on page 211). 25.3 What You Need To Know The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface (LAN to WAN, WLAN to WAN) must be less than or equal to the Upstream Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth Management Advanced screen (Section 25.5 on page 207). The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN interface (WAN to LAN, WAN to WLAN) must be less than or equal to the Downstream Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth Management Advanced screen Section 25.5 on page 207. 25.4 General Screen Use this screen to have the NBG4615 apply bandwidth management. Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen. Figure 117 Management > Bandwidth Management > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Management > Bandwidth Management > General LABEL Enable Bandwidth Management DESCRIPTION This field allows you to have NBG4615 apply bandwidth management. Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule. Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule. 206 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 25 Bandwidth Management Table 74 Management > Bandwidth Management > General (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 25.5 Advanced Screen Use this screen to configure bandwidth management rules for the pre-defined services or applications. You can also use this screen to configure bandwidth management rule for other services or applications that are not on the pre-defined list of NBG4615. Additionally, you can define the source and destination IP addresses and port for a service or application. Note: The two tables shown in this screen can be configured and applied at the same time. NBG4615 Users Guide 207 Chapter 25 Bandwidth Management Click Management > Bandwidth Management > Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen. Figure 118 Management > Bandwidth Management > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 75 Management > Bandwidth Management > Advanced LABEL Management Bandwidth Upstream Bandwidth DESCRIPTION Select the total amount of bandwidth (from 64 Kilobits to 32 Megabits) that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic. Downstream Bandwidth This is traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN. Select the total amount of bandwidth (from 64 Kilobits to 32 Megabits) that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic. This is traffic from WAN to LAN/WLAN. Application List Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on a pre-

defined service. 208 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 25 Bandwidth Management Table 75 Management > Bandwidth Management > Advanced (continued) LABEL Priority DESCRIPTION Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High, Mid or Low. High - Select this for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Mid - Select this for "excellent effort" or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. Low - Select this for non-critical "background" traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Category Service This is the category where a service belongs. This is the name of the service. Advanced Setting User-defined Service

Enable Select the check box to have the NBG4615 apply this bandwidth management rule. Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen where you can modify the rule. Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications or services you specify. This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select this check box to have the NBG4615 apply this bandwidth management rule. 25.5.1 Rule Configuration: Application Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for a pre-defined service or application, click the Edit icon in the Application List table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays. Figure 119 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: Application List NBG4615 Users Guide 209 Chapter 25 Bandwidth Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: Application List LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the port number of the destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. See Appendix F on page 321 for some common services and port numbers. This is the port number of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. See Appendix F on page 321 for some common services and port numbers. 25.5.2 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for other applications or services, click the Edit icon in the User-defined Service table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays. Figure 120 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: User-defined Service The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: User-defined Service LABEL BW Budget DESCRIPTION Select Maximum Bandwidth or Minimum Bandwidth and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second. Enter the starting IP address of the destination computer. Destination Address Start The NBG4615 applies bandwidth management to the service or application that is entering this computer. 210 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 25 Bandwidth Management Table 77 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: User-defined Service LABEL Destination Address End DESCRIPTION Enter the ending IP address of the destination computer. Destination Port Source Address Start Source Address End Source Port Protocol Apply Cancel The NBG4615 applies bandwidth management to the service or application that is entering this computer. This is the port number of the destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Enter the starting IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service. The NBG4615 applies bandwidth management to traffic initiating from this computer. Enter the ending IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service. The NBG4615 applies bandwidth management to traffic initiating from this computer. This is the port number of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, BOTH) for which the bandwidth management rule applies. If you select BOTH, enter the protocol for which the bandwidth management rule applies. For example, ICMP for ping traffic. Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. See Appendix F on page 321 for commonly used services and port numbers. 25.6 Monitor Screen Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using. The bandwidth is measured in kilobits per second (kbps). NBG4615 Users Guide 211 Chapter 25 Bandwidth Management The monitor shows what kinds of applications are running in the network, the maximum kbps that each application can use, as well as the percentage of bandwidth it is using. Figure 121 Management > Bandwidth Management > Monitor 25.6.1 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services The following is a description of some services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management in the Management > Bandwidth Management > Advanced screen. Table 78 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services SERVICE FTP DESCRIPTION File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. The World Wide Web (WWW) is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser. Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:

Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP. Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP. SIP is an application-layer control

(signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. WWW E-Mail VoIP (SIP) SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP. 212 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 25 Bandwidth Management Table 78 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services (continued) SERVICE BitTorrent DESCRIPTION BitTorrent is a free P2P (peer-to-peer) sharing tool allowing you to distribute large software and media files. BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself. It distributes files by corporation and trading, that is, the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file. Online gaming services lets you play multiplayer games on the Internet via broadband technology. As of this writing, your NBG4615 supports Xbox, Playstation, Battlenet and MSN Game Zone. Gaming NBG4615 Users Guide 213 Chapter 25 Bandwidth Management 214 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 26 Remote Management 26.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens. Remote Management allows you to manage your NBG4615 from a remote location through the following interfaces:

LAN and WAN LAN only WAN only Note: The NBG4615 is managed using the Web Configurator. 26.2 What You Need to Know Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:

1 2 3 The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field (Section 26.3 on page 216) does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the NBG4615 will disconnect the session immediately. There is already another remote management session. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. 26.2.1 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:

Use the NBG4615s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Use the NBG4615s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. NBG4615 Users Guide 215 Chapter 26 Remote Management 26.2.2 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The NBG4615 automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. You can change the timeout period in the System screen 26.3 WWW Screen To change your NBG4615s remote management settings, click Management >

Remote Management > WWW. Figure 122 Management > Remote Management > WWW The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Management > Remote Management > WWW LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG4615 using this service. Select All to allow all computes to access the NBG4615. Otherwise, check Selected and specify the IP address of the computer that can access the NBG4615. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Server Access Secured Client IP Address Apply Cancel 216 NBG4615 Users Guide 27 CHAPTER Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 27.1 Overview This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator. Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. 27.2 What You Need to Know UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder

(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. 27.2.1 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. NBG4615 Users Guide 217 Chapter 27 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 27.2.2 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the NBG4615 allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. 27.3 UPnP Screen Use this screen to enable UPnP on your NBG4615. Click Management > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 123 Management > UPnP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 80 Management > UPnP LABEL Enable the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Feature Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the NBG4615's IP address

(although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. 218 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 27 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 27.4 Technical Reference The sections show examples of using UPnP. 27.4.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG4615. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG4615. Turn on your computer and the NBG4615. 27.4.1.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 Click start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. Figure 124 Network Connections NBG4615 Users Guide 219 Chapter 27 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 4 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Figure 125 Internet Connection Properties You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Figure 126 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Figure 127 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 220 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 27 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Note: When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 5 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. Figure 128 System Tray Icon 6 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Figure 129 Internet Connection Status 27.4.2 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the NBG4615 without finding out the IP address of the NBG4615 first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the NBG4615. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. NBG4615 Users Guide 221 Chapter 27 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Figure 130 Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. 5 Right-click on the icon for your NBG4615 and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Figure 131 Network Connections: My Network Places 222 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 27 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 6 Right-click on the icon for your NBG4615 and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the NBG4615. Figure 132 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example NBG4615 Users Guide 223 Chapter 27 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 224 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 28 Maintenance 28.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Maintenance screens. 28.2 What You Can Do Use the General screen to set the timeout period of the management session

(Section 28.3 on page 226). Use the Password screen to change your NBG4615s system password (Section 28.4 on page 226). Use the Time screen to change your NBG4615s time and date (Section 28.5 on page 228). Use the Firmware Upgrade screen to upload firmware to your NBG4615

(Section 28.6 on page 230). Use the Backup/Restore screen to view information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration (Section 28.8 on page 233). Use the Reset/Restart screen to reboot the NBG4615 without turning the power off (Section 28.8 on page 233). Use the Sys OP Mode screen to select how you want to use your NBG4615

(Section 28.10 on page 236). NBG4615 Users Guide 225 Chapter 28 Maintenance 28.3 General Screen Use this screen to set the management session timeout period. Click Maintenance > General. The following screen displays. Figure 133 Maintenance > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 81 Maintenance > General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Setup System Name Domain Name Administrator Inactivity Timer Apply Cancel System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG4615 in an Ethernet network. Enter the domain name you want to give to the NBG4615. Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 28.4 Password Screen It is strongly recommended that you change your NBG4615's password. If you forget your NBG4615's password (or IP address), you will need to reset the device. See Section 28.8 on page 233 for details. 226 NBG4615 Users Guide Click Maintenance > Password. The screen appears as shown. Figure 134 Maintenance > Password Chapter 28 Maintenance The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 82 Maintenance > Password LABEL Password Setup Old Password New Password DESCRIPTION Change your NBG4615s password (recommended) using the fields as shown. Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each character you type. Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. NBG4615 Users Guide 227 Chapter 28 Maintenance 28.5 Time Setting Screen Use this screen to configure the NBG4615s time based on your local time zone. To change your NBG4615s time and date, click Maintenance > Time. The screen appears as shown. Figure 135 Maintenance > Time The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 83 Maintenance > Time LABEL Current Time and Date Current Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the time of your NBG4615. Current Date Each time you reload this page, the NBG4615 synchronizes the time with the time server. This field displays the date of your NBG4615. Each time you reload this page, the NBG4615 synchronizes the date with the time server. Current Time and Date Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it. 228 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 28 Maintenance Table 83 Maintenance > Time (continued) LABEL New Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually.

(hh:mm:ss) New Date

(yyyy/mm/dd) Get from Time Server Auto User Defined Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone Daylight Savings Start Date When you select Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you select Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Select this radio button to have the NBG4615 get the time and date from the time server you specified below. Select Auto to have the NBG4615 automatically search for an available time server and synchronize the date and time with the time server after you click Apply. Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, April and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). NBG4615 Users Guide 229 Chapter 28 Maintenance Table 83 Maintenance > Time (continued) LABEL End Date DESCRIPTION Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Last, Sunday, October and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Apply Cancel 28.6 Firmware Upgrade Screen Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a *.bin extension, e.g., NBG4615.bin. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4615. Figure 136 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade 230 NBG4615 Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 28 Maintenance Table 84 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Click this to check for the latest updated firmware. Browse... Upload Check for Latest Firmware Now Note: Do not turn off the NBG4615 while firmware upload is in progress!

After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the NBG4615 again. The NBG4615 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 137 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, an error message appears. Click Return to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen. 28.7 Configuration Backup/Restore Screen Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the NBG4615s current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your NBG4615 is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. NBG4615 Users Guide 231 Chapter 28 Maintenance Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NBG4615. Click Maintenance > Backup/Restore. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown next. Figure 138 Maintenance > Backup/Restore The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 85 Maintenance > Backup/Restore LABEL Backup DESCRIPTION Click Backup to save the NBG4615s current configuration to your computer. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. File Path Browse... 232 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 28 Maintenance Table 85 Maintenance > Backup/Restore (continued) LABEL Upload DESCRIPTION Click Upload to begin the upload process. Note: Do not turn off the NBG4615 while configuration file upload is in progress. After you see a configuration upload successful screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the NBG4615 again. The NBG4615 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. If you see an error screen, click Back to return to the Backup/Restore screen. Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration information and returns the NBG4615 to its factory defaults. You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your NBG4615. Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web Configurator for more information on the RESET button. Reset Note: If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG4615 IP address (192.168.1.2). See Appendix D on page 277 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. 28.8 Reset/Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the NBG4615 without turning the power off. Click Maintenance > Reset/Restart to open the following screen. Figure 139 Maintenance > Reset/Restart Click Restart to have the NBG4615 reboot. This does not affect the NBG4615's configuration. NBG4615 Users Guide 233 Chapter 28 Maintenance 28.9 System Operation Mode Overview The Sys OP Mode (System Operation Mode) function lets you configure your NBG4615 as an access point, wireless client or both at the same time. You can choose between Router, Access Point Mode, Universal Repeater Mode, and WISP Mode depending on your network topology and the features you require from your device. The following describes the device modes available in your NBG4615. Router A router connects your local network with another network, such as the Internet. The router has two IP addresses, the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address. Figure 140 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode Access Point An access point enabled all ethernet ports to be bridged together and be in the same subnet. To connect to the Internet, another device, such as a router, is required. Figure 141 Access Point Mode 234 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 28 Maintenance Universal Repeater NBG4615 in Universal Repeater mode work as an access point and wireless client simultaneously. Figure 142 Universal Repeater Mode WISP A WISP client connects to an existing access point wirelessly. It acts just like a wireless client in notebooks/computers. Figure 143 IP Address in Access Point Mode Wireless Client Access Point NBG4615 Users Guide 235 Chapter 28 Maintenance 28.10 Sys OP Mode Screen Use this screen to select how you want to use your NBG4615. Figure 144 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode The following table describes the labels in the General screen. Table 86 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode LABEL System Operation Mode Router DESCRIPTION Select Router Mode if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet. This mode offers services such as a firewall or bandwidth management. Access Point You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port. Contact your ISP or system administrator for more information on appropriate settings. Select Access Point Mode if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network. In Access Point Mode, all Ethernet ports have the same IP address. All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports, including the port labeled WAN. There is no WAN port. The DHCP server on your device is disabled. The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.2. 236 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 28 Maintenance Table 86 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode (continued) LABEL Universal Repeater Mode DESCRIPTION Select Universal Repeater Mode if you want to have wireless clients associate with the NBG4615 and also want to connect the NBG4615 to an existing access point. In addition to wireless LAN settings between the NBG4615 and wireless clients, you also need to configure security and wireless settings between the NBG4615 and another access point. WDS is not available when the NBG4615 is in Universal Repeater Mode. The IP address of the device on the local network is the same as the IP address given to the NBG4615 while in Access Point Mode (default is 192.168.1.2). WISP Mode Select WISP Mode if your device needs a wireless client to connect to an existing access point. You cannot configure Wireless LAN settings (including WPS) and scheduling in the WISP Mode. The IP address of the device on the local network is the same as the IP address given to the NBG4615 while in router mode

(default is 192.168.1.1). Click Apply to save your settings. Click Cancel to return your settings to the default (Router). Apply Cancel Note: If you select the incorrect System Operation Mode you may not be able to connect to the Internet. NBG4615 Users Guide 237 Chapter 28 Maintenance 238 NBG4615 Users Guide CHAPTER 29 Troubleshooting 29.1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs NBG4615 Access and Login Internet Access Resetting the NBG4615 to Its Factory Defaults Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting ZyXEL Share Center Utility Problems 29.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The NBG4615 does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG4615. 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG4615 and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG4615. 4 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. NBG4615 Users Guide 239 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 22. 2 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor to the NBG4615. 5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 29.3 NBG4615 Access and Login I dont know the IP address of my NBG4615. 1 2 3 The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the NBG4615 by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the NBG4615 (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser.Set your device to Router Mode, login (see the Quick Start Guide for instructions) and go to the Device Information table in the Status screen. Your NBG4615s IP address is available in the Device Information table. If the DHCP setting under LAN information is None, your device has a fixed IP address. If the DHCP setting under LAN information is Client, then your device receives an IP address from a DHCP server on the network. If your NBG4615 is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network. Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information. 4 Reset your NBG4615 to change all settings back to their default. This means your current settings are lost. See Section 29.5 on page 244 in the Troubleshooting for information on resetting your NBG4615. 240 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 29 Troubleshooting I forgot the password. 1 2 The default password is 1234. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 29.5 on page 244. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section 7.3 on page 102), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I dont know the IP address of my NBG4615. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScript and Java enabled. See Appendix B on page 253. 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG4615. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NBG4615, skip this step.) If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102. If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computers IP address is in the same subnet as the NBG4615. See Section 7.3 on page 102. 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NBG4615 with the default IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102. 6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Try to access the NBG4615 using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the NBG4615, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the NBG4615 does not respond to HTTP. NBG4615 Users Guide 241 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NBG4615. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default password is 1234. This field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 You cannot log in to the Web Configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the NBG4615. Log out of the NBG4615 in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session. Try logging in again after 5 minutes. 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG4615. 5 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 29.5 on page 244. 29.4 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. Go to Network > Wireless LAN > General > WDS and check if the NBG4615 is set to bridge mode. Select Disable and try to connect to the Internet again. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 5 Go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General. Check your System Operation Mode setting. 242 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 29 Troubleshooting Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet. Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network. 6 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NBG4615), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 22. 2 Reboot the NBG4615. 3 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.5 on page 22. If the NBG4615 is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. 2 Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the NBG4615 closer to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). 3 Reboot the NBG4615. 4 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestion Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. NBG4615 Users Guide 243 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 29.5 Resetting the NBG4615 to Its Factory Defaults If you reset the NBG4615, you lose all of the changes you have made. The NBG4615 re-loads its default settings, and the password resets to 1234. You have to make all of your changes again. You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button. To reset the NBG4615:

1 Make sure the power LED is on. 2 3 Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart/reboot the NBG4615. Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG4615 back to its factory-default configurations. If the NBG4615 restarts automatically, wait for the NBG4615 to finish restarting, and log in to the Web Configurator. The password is 1234. If the NBG4615 does not restart automatically, disconnect and reconnect the NBG4615s power. Then, follow the directions above again. 29.6 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting I cannot access the NBG4615 or ping any computer from the WLAN (wireless AP or router). 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG4615. 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly. 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG4615. 4 Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the NBG4615. 244 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 5 Check that both the NBG4615 and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings. 6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the NBG4615. 7 Make sure you allow the NBG4615 to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface. Check your remote management settings. See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the Users Guide for more information. I set up URL keyword blocking, but I can still access a website that should be blocked. Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyword Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen. Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List. If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a URL, customize the keyword blocking using commands. See the Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filtering chapter. I can access the Internet, but I cannot open my network folders. In the Network > LAN > Advanced screen, make sure Allow between LAN and WAN is checked. This is not checked by default to keep the LAN secure. If you still cannot access a network folder, make sure your account has access rights to the folder you are trying to open. I cannot access the Web Configurator after I switched to AP mode. When you change from router mode to AP mode, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. Refer to Appendix D on page 277 for instructions on how to change your computers IP address. NBG4615 Users Guide 245 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?

The following factors may cause interference:

Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on. Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs. Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices. To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:

Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low. Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones. Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client. Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional APs if necessary. Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet. Position the antennas for best reception. If the AP is placed on a table or floor, point the antennas upwards. If the AP is placed at a high position, point the antennas downwards. Try pointing the antennas in different directions and check which provides the strongest signal to the wireless clients. 29.7 ZyXEL Share Center Utility Problems I cannot access or see a USB device that is connected to the NBG4615. 1 Disconnect the problematic USB device, then reconnect it to the NBG4615. 2 Ensure that the USB device in question has power. 3 Check your cable connections. 4 Restart the NBG4615 by disconnecting the power and then reconnecting it. 246 NBG4615 Users Guide Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 5 6 If the USB device requires a special driver, install the driver from the installation disc that came with the device. After driver installation, reconnect the USB device to the NBG4615 and try to connect to it again with your computer. If the problem persists, contact your vendor. I cannot install the ZyXEL Share Center Utility. 1 Make sure that the set up program is one required for your operating system. 2 Install the latest patches and updates for your operating system. 3 Check the zyxel.com download site for a newer version of the utility. NBG4615 Users Guide 247 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 248 NBG4615 Users Guide APPENDIX A Product Specifications The following tables summarize the NBG4615s hardware and firmware features. Table 87 Hardware Features Dimensions Weight SDRAM Flash Memory Power Specification 162 mm (W) x 106 mm (D) x 28 mm (H) 285g 32 MB 8 MB Input: 100~240 AC, 50~60 Hz Ethernet ports Built-in Switch LEDs Reset button WPS button Power switch WLAN switch Antenna USB Port Output: 12 V DC 1.5A Auto-negotiating: 100 Mbps, 1000 Mbps in either half-duplex or full-duplex mode. Auto-crossover: Use either crossover or straight-through Ethernet cables. A combination of switch and router makes your NBG4615 a cost-

effective and viable network solution. You can add up to two computers to the NBG4615 without the cost of a hub when connecting to the Internet through the WAN port. You can add up to three computers to the NBG4615 when you connect to the Internet in AP mode. Add more than four computers to your LAN by using a hub. Power, LAN1-4, WAN, Internet/WPS, USB1-2 The reset button is built into the rear panel. Use this button to restore the NBG4615 to its factory default settings. Press for 1 second to restart the device. Press for 5 seconds to restore to factory default settings. Press the WPS on two WPS enabled devices within 120 seconds for a security-enabled wireless connection. Turn on or turn off the power of the NBG4615 using this switch. Turn on or turn off the wireless function of the NBG4615 using this switch. There is no need to go into the Web Configurator. The NBG4615 is equipped with two 2dBi (or 5dBi) detachable antenna to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the wireless network. The NBG4615 has two built-in USB 2.0 type A for USB device connectivity and supports 3G USB dongle. NBG4615 Users Guide 249 Appendix A Product Specifications Table 87 Hardware Features (continued) Operation Environment Humidity: 10% ~ 90%

Temperature: 0 C ~ 40 C / 32F ~ 104F Storage Environment Temperature: -30 C ~ 70 C / -22F ~ 158F Humidity: 10% ~ 95%

Table 88 Firmware Features FEATURE Default LAN IP Address DESCRIPTION 192.168.1.1 (router) Default LAN Subnet Mask Default Password DHCP Pool Wireless Interface Default Wireless SSID Device Management Wireless Functionality Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup &

Restoration Network Address Translation (NAT) Firewall 192.168.1.2. (AP) 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) 1234 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64 Wireless LAN ZyXEL Use the Web Configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the NBG4615. Allows IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n wireless clients to connect to the NBG4615 wirelessly. Enable wireless security (WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network. Note: The NBG4615 may be prone to RF (Radio Frequency) interference from other 2.4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens, wireless phones, Bluetooth enabled devices, and other wireless LANs. Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site and use the Web Configurator to put it on the NBG4615. Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!

Make a copy of the NBG4615s configuration and put it back on the NBG4615 later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration. Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address. Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network. You can configure firewall on the NBG4615 for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, by default, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example. 250 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 88 Firmware Features (continued) FEATURE Content Filter DESCRIPTION The NBG4615 blocks or allows access to web sites that you specify and blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you specify. Time and Date Port Forwarding Remote Management Wireless LAN Scheduler DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Bandwidth Management You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTP traffic for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the NBG4615. You can schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled/

disabled. Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your NBG4615. You can also set the time manually. These dates and times are then used in logs. If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network, then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet. Use this feature to have the NBG4615 assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider. IP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The NBG4615 supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP

(Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236). Use logs for troubleshooting. You can view logs in the Web Configurator. PPPoE mimics a dial-up Internet access connection. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) enables secure transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network (VPN). The NBG4615 supports one PPTP connection at a time. The NBG4615 can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a network. Universal Plug and Play

(UPnP) PPPoE PPTP Encapsulation Dynamic DNS Support IP Multicast Logging 29.8 Wall-mounting Instructions Complete the following steps to hang your NBG4615 on a wall. 1 Select a position free of obstructions on a sturdy wall. 2 Drill two holes for the screws. NBG4615 Users Guide 251 Appendix A Product Specifications Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws. 3 Do not insert the screws all the way into the wall. Leave a small gap of about 0.5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall. 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall. They need to hold the weight of the NBG4615 with the connection cables. 5 Align the holes on the back of the NBG4615 with the screws on the wall. Hang the NBG4615 on the screws. Figure 145 Wall-mounting Example The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting. All measurements are in millimeters (mm). Figure 146 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 252 NBG4615 Users Guide

APPENDIX B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: The screens used below belong to Internet Explorer version 6, 7 and 8. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 147 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. NBG4615 Users Guide 253 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. 2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 148 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. 254 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. Figure 149 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. NBG4615 Users Guide 255 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 150 Pop-up Blocker Settings 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. 6 Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScript If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScript are allowed. 256 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 151 Internet Options: Security 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). NBG4615 Users Guide 257 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window. Figure 152 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 258 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window. Figure 153 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. NBG4615 Users Guide 259 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 154 Java (Sun) Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary slightly. The steps below apply to Mozilla Firefox 3.0 as well. You can enable Java, Javascript and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears. Figure 155 Mozilla Firefox: TOOLS > Options 260 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Click Content to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 156 Mozilla Firefox Content Security Opera Opera 10 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary slightly. NBG4615 Users Guide 261 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Allowing Pop-Ups From Opera, click Tools, then Preferences. In the General tab, go to Choose how you prefer to handle pop-ups and select Open all pop-ups. Figure 157 Opera: Allowing Pop-Ups 262 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Enabling Java From Opera, click Tools, then Preferences. In the Advanced tab, select Content from the left-side menu. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 158 Opera: Enabling Java To customize JavaScript behavior in the Opera browser, click JavaScript Options. Figure 159 Opera: JavaScript Options Select the items you want Operas JavaScript to apply. NBG4615 Users Guide 263 Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 264 NBG4615 Users Guide APPENDIX C IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device

(including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered. Structure An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. NBG4615 Users Guide 265 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets

(192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. Figure 160 Network Number and Host ID How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask. Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term subnet is short for sub-network. A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 89 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Network Number Host ID 266 2ND OCTET:

(168) 10101000 4TH 1ST OCTET OCTET:

(2)

(192) 11000000 00000010 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 11000000 10101000 00000001 3RD OCTET:

(1) 00000001 00000010 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a 1 value). For example, an 8-bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 90 Subnet Masks 3RD OCTET 2ND OCTET BINARY 1ST OCTET 11111111 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 4TH OCTET 00000000 00000000 00000000 11111000 DECIMAL 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.248 8-bit mask 16-bit mask 24-bit mask 29-bit mask Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network

(192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:

Table 91 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE 255.0.0.0 8 bits 24 bits 16 bits 255.255.0.0 16 bits 24 bits 255.255.255.0 8 bits 29 bits 255.255.255.248 3 bits 224 2 216 2 28 2 23 2 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 16777214 65534 254 6 NBG4615 Users Guide 267 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a / followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations. Table 92 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK ALTERNATIVE NOTATION

/24

/25

/26

/27

/28

/29

/30 LAST OCTET

(BINARY) 0000 0000 1000 0000 1100 0000 1110 0000 1111 0000 1111 1000 1111 1100 LAST OCTET

(DECIMAL) 0 128 192 224 240 248 252 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts. 268 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. Figure 161 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or

/25). The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-networks, A and B. Figure 162 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting NBG4615 Users Guide 269 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnets address itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. Example: Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits

(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Table 93 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address (Decimal) IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.63 Table 94 Subnet 2 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.127 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 270 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 95 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.191 Table 96 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.255 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 11000000 11000000 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001

. 11111111.11111111.11111111

. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 Example: Eight Subnets Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 97 Eight Subnets SUBNET FIRST ADDRESS LAST SUBNET ADDRESS 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ADDRESS 30 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 BROADCAST ADDRESS 31 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 NBG4615 Users Guide 271 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET MASK Table 98 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 SUBNET MASK Table 99 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 255.255.128.0 (/17) 255.255.192.0 (/18) 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 SUBNET 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 SUBNET 32766 16382 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP 272 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the NBG4615. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your NBG4615 that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG4615 will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615 unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;

always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. NBG4615 Users Guide 273 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address. Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources. The devices may also be unreachable through the network. Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example computer A has a static (or fixed) IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client. Neither can access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically. Figure 163 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks, it must have interfaces using different network numbers. For example, if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet

(WAN), the routers LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets. In the 274 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting following example, the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet. The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks. Figure 164 Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example, the computer and the routers LAN port both use 192.168.1.1 as the IP address. The computer cannot access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the routers LAN port. Figure 165 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example NBG4615 Users Guide 275 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting 276 NBG4615 Users Guide D APPENDIX Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Note: Your specific NBG4615 may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported. This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network. Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP/IP on your computer. If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure that your networks computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet. In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for:

Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 278 Windows Vista on page 281 Windows 7 on page 285 Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 289 Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 on page 292 Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 295 Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) on page 300 NBG4615 Users Guide 277 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Windows XP/NT/2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT. 1 Click Start > Control Panel. 2 In the Control Panel, click the Network Connections icon. 278 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. 4 On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click Properties. NBG4615 Users Guide 279 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens. 6 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided. 7 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 8 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. 280 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional. 1 Click Start > Control Panel. 2 In the Control Panel, click the Network and Internet icon. 3 Click the Network and Sharing Center icon. NBG4615 Users Guide 281 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 4 Click Manage network connections. 5 Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 282 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties. NBG4615 Users Guide 283 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens. 8 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.Click Advanced. 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 284 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. Windows 7 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise. 1 Click Start > Control Panel. 2 In the Control Panel, click View network status and tasks under the Network and Internet category. NBG4615 Users Guide 285 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 Click Change adapter settings. 4 Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 286 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties. NBG4615 Users Guide 287 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens. 7 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided. Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP, DNS and WINS. 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 288 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 2 3 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. The IP settings are displayed as follows. Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3. 1 Click Apple > System Preferences. NBG4615 Users Guide 289 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the System Preferences window, click the Network icon. 3 When the Network preferences pane opens, select Built-in Ethernet from the network connection type list, and then click Configure. 290 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 list in the TCP/IP tab. 5 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure IPv4 list, select Manually. In the IP Address field, type your IP address. In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask. In the Router field, type the IP address of your device. 6 Click Apply Now and close the window. NBG4615 Users Guide 291 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the Info tab. Figure 166 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5 but can also apply to 10.6. 1 Click Apple > System Preferences. 292 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In System Preferences, click the Network icon. 3 When the Network preferences pane opens, select Ethernet from the list of available connection types. 4 From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings. NBG4615 Users Guide 293 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure list, select Manually. In the IP Address field, enter your IP address. In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask. In the Router field, enter the IP address of your NBG4615. 6 Click Apply and close the window. 294 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab. Figure 167 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. NBG4615 Users Guide 295 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME:

1 Click System > Administration > Network. 2 When the Network Settings window opens, click Unlock to open the Authenticate window. (By default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.) You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password. 296 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 In the Authenticate window, enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button. 4 In the Network Settings window, select the connection that you want to configure, then click Properties. NBG4615 Users Guide 297 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The Properties dialog box opens. In the Configuration list, select Automatic Configuration (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. In the Configuration list, select Static IP address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address fields. 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen. 7 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes. 298 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking System > Administration > Network Tools, and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices tab. The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly. Figure 168 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools NBG4615 Users Guide 299 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the K Desktop Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE:

1 Click K Menu > Computer > Administrator Settings (YaST). 2 When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and click OK. 300 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens, select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon. 4 When the Network Settings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the appropriate connection Name from the list, and then click the Configure button. NBG4615 Users Guide 301 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens, click the Address tab Figure 169 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup 6 Select Dynamic Address (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Hostname fields. 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window. 302 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Hostname/DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window. Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP properties. From the Options sub-menu, select Show Connection Information. Figure 170 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager NBG4615 Users Guide 303 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computers IP Address When the Connection Status - KNetwork Manager window opens, click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly. Figure 171 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager 304 NBG4615 Users Guide APPENDIX E Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 172 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate NBG4615 Users Guide 305 Appendix E Wireless LANs with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 173 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. 306 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. Figure 174 Infrastructure WLAN Channel A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. RTS/CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or NBG4615 Users Guide 307 Appendix E Wireless LANs wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. Figure 175 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS

(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. 308 NBG4615 Users Guide Fragmentation Threshold Appendix E Wireless LANs A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the NBG4615 uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point

(and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has NBG4615 Users Guide 309 Appendix E Wireless LANs several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:

MODULATION Table 100 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE

(MBPS) 1 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/

48/54 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the NBG4615 are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the NBG4615 identity. The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your NBG4615. Table 101 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Least Secure SECURITY TYPE Unique SSID (Default) Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) WPA2 Most Secure Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the NBG4615 and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. 310 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:

User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:

Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:

Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. NBG4615 Users Guide 311 Appendix E Wireless LANs Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:

Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate

(also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. 312 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-

TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. NBG4615 Users Guide 313 Appendix E Wireless LANs Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 102 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty Client Identity Protection EAP-MD5 No No No No None Easy No EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Hard No Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes LEAP PEAP Yes Yes No Optional No Yes Yes Yes Strong Moderate Moderate Moderate Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2

(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. 314 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP). TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a per-

packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption NBG4615 Users Guide 315 Appendix E Wireless LANs keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP) User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-

authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number

(default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. 3 A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client. 316 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. Figure 176 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 2 3 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches. The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID. NBG4615 Users Guide 317 Appendix E Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 177 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 103 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open ENCRYPTIO N METHOD None No ENTER MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X Open WEP Shared WEP No Yes Yes No Yes WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES Yes No Yes No Yes 318 Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz

(IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antennas coverage area. Antenna Gain Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications. For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment. Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides. Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications. NBG4615 Users Guide 319 Appendix E Wireless LANs Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points. Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications. Positioning Antennas In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-topoint application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible. For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area. 320 NBG4615 Users Guide APPENDIX F Common Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/

code numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) web site. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/

UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. Table 104 Commonly Used Services NAME AH

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) PROTOCOL User-Defined PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 51 AIM/New-ICQ TCP AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP DNS UDP TCP/UDP 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. It is also used as a listening port by ICQ. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for example www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. NBG4615 Users Guide 321 Appendix F Common Services Table 104 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME ESP

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) PROTOCOL User-Defined PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 50 FINGER FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP 79 20 21 1720 80 443 User-Defined 1 ICQ UDP 4000 IGMP

(MULTICAST) User-Defined 2 IKE IRC UDP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP TCP TCP UDP TCP NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING 500 6667 1863 5190 144 2049 119 User-Defined 1 POP3 TCP 110 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Management Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/

server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). 322 NBG4615 Users Guide Table 104 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME PPTP PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 1723 PPTP_TUNNEL

(GRE) User-Defined 47 RCMD REAL_AUDIO TCP TCP REXEC RLOGIN RTELNET RTSP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP SFTP SMTP TCP TCP SNMP TCP/UDP SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP SQL-NET TCP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TCP/UDP UDP UDP TACACS TELNET UDP TCP 512 7070 514 513 107 554 115 25 161 162 1521 22 1558 514 49 23 Appendix F Common Services Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. Simple File Transfer Protocol. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP

(RFC:1215). Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. NBG4615 Users Guide 323 Appendix F Common Services Table 104 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME TFTP PROTOCOL UDP PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 69 VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP

(Transmission Control Protocol). Another videoconferencing solution. 324 NBG4615 Users Guide APPENDIX G IPv6 Overview IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits

(start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. NBG4615 Users Guide 325 Appendix G IPv6 Link-local Address A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as follows. Table 105 Link-local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 10 bits Interface ID 64 bits 0 54 bits Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3. Unspecified Address An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address. It is similar to 0.0.0.0 in IPv4. Loopback Address A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to 127.0.0.1 in IPv4. Multicast Address In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group. Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses. Table 106 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 DESCRIPTION All hosts on a local node. All routers on a local node. All hosts on a local connected link. All routers on a local connected link. All routers on a local site. All DHCP severs on a local site. 326 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix G IPv6 The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group. Table 107 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. Interface ID In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should have a unique interface ID. EUI-64 The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the NBG4615 Users Guide 327 Appendix G IPv6 MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the following example. MAC 00 : 13 : 49 : 12 : 34

: 56 EUI-64 02 : 13 : 49 : FF

: FE

: 12 : 34

: 56 Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated. Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses dont need to be maintained by a DHCP server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own Ethernet MAC address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address. When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address (beginning with fe80). When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the NBG4615 is set to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 3another address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a routable global IP address. DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP. Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device. Identity Association An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. 3. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses. 328 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix G IPv6 Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information. The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's discretion. T1 T2 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Rebind to S2 Rebind to S2 DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-

local address and a well-known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network. The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts. Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The NBG4615 uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements (RAs) regularly by multicast, the NBG4615 Users Guide 329 Appendix G IPv6 NBG4615 passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping". Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track neighbors reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:

Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbors link-layer address (MAC address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being reachable means it responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement message. Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address. Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets. Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters. IPv6 Cache An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router list. The NBG4615 maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response messages. In IPv6, the NBG4615 configures a link-local address automatically, and then sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be resolved or verified, the NBG4615 also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the NBG4615 receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbors link-layer address in the neighbor cache. When the NBG4615 uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement message, it adds the routers information to the neighbor cache, prefix list and destination cache. The NBG4615 creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router. 330 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix G IPv6 When the NBG4615 needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the NBG4615 uses the prefix list to determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing through a router. If the address is unlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the NBG4615 determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP address is known, the NBG4615 looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the NBG4615 cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages. Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4. MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join. MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message for that address. An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This NBG4615 Users Guide 331 Appendix G IPv6 also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses. C:\>ipv6 install Installing... Succeeded. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IP Address. : 10.1.1.46 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 IP Address. : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4 Default Gateway . : 10.1.1.254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer. Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.) This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:

1 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer. 2 After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-

DHCPv6 > Client Install as service. 3 Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. 332 NBG4615 Users Guide 4 Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client. Appendix G IPv6 5 Click Start and then OK. 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer. To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:

NBG4615 Users Guide 333 Appendix G IPv6 1 Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection. 2 Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it. 3 Click OK to save the change. 4 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen. 5 Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 334 NBG4615 Users Guide 6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server. Appendix G IPv6 C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IPv6 Address. : 2001:b021:2d::1000 Link-local IPv6 Address . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11 IPv4 Address. : 172.16.100.61 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11 172.16.100.254 NBG4615 Users Guide 335 Appendix G IPv6 336 NBG4615 Users Guide H APPENDIX Open Software Announcements End-User License Agreement for "NBG4615"

WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU, IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. HOWEVER, CERTAIN ZYXEL'S PRODUCTS MAY CONTAIN-IN PART-SOME THIRD PARTY'S FREE AND OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY, RUN, DISTRIBUTE, MODIFY AND IMPROVE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTY'S LICENSES ("OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS"). THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW. ZYXEL MAY HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND/OR SOFTWARE, OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FREELY COPY, MODIFY AND REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY. NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND LICENSES YOU MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY. 1.Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-

sublicense, non-transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"), including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for internal business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted NBG4615 Users Guide 337 Appendix H Open Software Announcements hereunder. Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are disclaimed. 2.Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software, Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement. 3.Copyright The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law, trade secret law, international treaty provisions, and the applicable national laws of each respective country. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation. 4.Restrictions You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance, technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer, decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License, you may not market, co-brand, and private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the third party software, and your use of such material is exclusively governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software other than compliance with the applicable license terms of such third party, and makes no warranty (express, implied or statutory) whatsoever with respect thereto. Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products. 338 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements 5.Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software. 6.No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-

INFRINGEMENT. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION, OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. 7.Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE, BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT'S PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NBG4615 Users Guide 339 Appendix H Open Software Announcements 8.Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8. 9.Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. 10.Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement. 11.General This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration. This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent 340 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements jurisdiction, the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties. NOTE: Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy, modify and redistribute the software. For at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software, we will give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support (support@zyxel.com.tw), for a charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs that we distributed to you if we are in possession of such. Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. This Product includes Linux Kernel , Uboot, Busybox, bpalogin, bridge-utils, dnsmasq, hotplug2, igmpproxy, iproute2, iptables, linux-igd, mtd-utils, ntpclient, ppp(pppd plugins), pptp, rp-l2pt, quagga, syslog-ng, updated, wireless_tools and gcc software under GPL 2.0 license. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. NBG4615 Users Guide 341 Appendix H Open Software Announcements Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 342 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;

keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But NBG4615 Users Guide 343 Appendix H Open Software Announcements when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;

rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.

(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components

(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, 344 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you

(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. NBG4615 Users Guide 345 Appendix H Open Software Announcements 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/

OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein, if any, are the property of their respective owners. 346 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements This Product includes curl software under below license COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) 1996 - 2007, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. All rights reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. NBG4615 Users Guide 347 Appendix H Open Software Announcements NOTICE Curl contains pieces of source code that is Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Kungliga Tekniska Hg skolan. This notice is included here to comply with the distribution terms. This Product includes goahead software under below license License Agreement THIS LICENSE ALLOWS ONLY THE LIMITED USE OF GO AHEAD SOFTWARE, INC. PROPRIETARY CODE. PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS AGREEMENT AS IT PERTAINS TO THIS LICENSE, YOU CERTIFY THAT YOU WILL USE THE SOFTWARE ONLY IN THE MANNER PERMITTED HEREIN. 1. Definitions. 1.1 "Documentation" means any documentation GoAhead includes with the Original Code. 1.2 "GoAhead" means Go Ahead Software, Inc. 1.3 "Intellectual Property Rights" means all rights, whether now existing or hereinafter acquired, in and to trade secrets, patents, copyrights, trademarks, know-how, as well as moral rights and similar rights of any type under the laws of any governmental authority, domestic or foreign, including rights in and to all applications and registrations relating to any of the foregoing. 348 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements 1.4 "License" or "Agreement" means this document. 1.5 "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications. 1.6 "Original Code" means the Source Code to GoAhead? proprietary computer software entitled GoAhead WebServer. 1.7 "Response Header" means the first portion of the response message output by the GoAhead WebServer, containing but not limited to, header fields for date, content-type, server identification and cache control. 1.8 "Server Identification Field" means the field in the Response Header which contains the text "Server: GoAhead-Webs". 1.9 "You" means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this license or a future version of this license. For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition, "control" means

(a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity. 2. Source Code License. 2.1 Limited Source Code Grant. GoAhead hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property claims, to use, reproduce, modify, copy and distribute the Original Code. NBG4615 Users Guide 349 Appendix H Open Software Announcements 2.2 Binary Code. GoAhead hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license to copy and distribute the binary code versions of the Original Code together with Your Modifications. 2.3 License Back to GoAhead. You hereby grant in both source code and binary code to GoAhead a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license to copy, modify, display, use and sublicense any Modifications You make that are distributed or planned for distribution. Within 30 days of either such event, You agree to ship to GoAhead a file containing the Modifications (in a media to be determined by the parties), including any programmers notes and other programmers materials. Additionally, You will provide to GoAhead a complete description of the product, the product code or model number, the date on which the product is initially shipped, and a contact name, phone number and e-mail address for future correspondence. GoAhead will keep confidential all data specifically marked as such. 2.4 Restrictions on Use. You may sublicense Modifications to third parties such as subcontractors or OEM's provided that You enter into license agreements with such third parties that bind such third parties to all the obligations under this Agreement applicable to you and that are otherwise substantially similar in scope and application to this Agreement. 3. Term. This Agreement and license are effective from the time You accept the terms of this Agreement until this Agreement is terminated. You may terminate this Agreement at any time by uninstalling or destroying all copies of the Original Code including any and all binary versions and removing any Modifications to the Original Code existing in any products. This Agreement will terminate immediately and without further notice if You fail to comply with any provision of this Agreement. All restrictions on use, and all other provisions that may reasonably be interpreted to survive termination of this Agreement, will survive termination of this Agreement for any reason. Upon termination, You agree to uninstall or destroy all copies of the Original Code, Modifications, and Documentation. 350 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements 4. Trademarks and Brand. 4.1 License and Use. GoAhead hereby grants to You a limited world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license to use the GoAhead trade names, trademarks, logos, service marks and product designations posted in Exhibit A (collectively, the "GoAhead Marks") in connection with the activities by You under this Agreement. Additionally, GoAhead grants You a license under the terms above to such GoAhead trademarks as shall be identified at a URL (the "URL") provided by GoAhead. The use by You of GoAhead Marks shall be in accordance with GoAhead? trademark policies regarding trademark usage as established at the web site designated by the URL, or as otherwise communicated to You by GoAhead at its sole discretion. You understand and agree that any use of GoAhead Marks in connection with this Agreement shall not create any right, title or interest in or to such GoAhead Marks and that all such use and goodwill associated with GoAhead Marks will inure to the benefit of GoAhead. 4.2 Promotion by You of GoAhead WebServer Mark. In consideration for the licenses granted by GoAhead to You herein, You agree to notify GoAhead when You incorporate the GoAhead WebServer in Your product and to inform GoAhead when such product begins to ship. You agree to promote the Original Code by prominently and visibly displaying a graphic of the GoAhead WebServer mark on the initial web page of Your product that is displayed each time a user connects to it. You also agree that GoAhead may identify your company as a user of the GoAhead WebServer in conjunction with its own marketing efforts. You may further promote the Original Code by displaying the GoAhead WebServer mark in marketing and promotional materials such as the home page of your web site or web pages promoting the product. 4.3 Placement of Copyright Notice by You. You agree to include copies of the following notice (the "Notice") regarding proprietary rights in all copies of the products that You distribute, as follows: (i) embedded in the object code; and (ii) on the title pages of all documentation. Furthermore, You agree to use commercially reasonable efforts to cause any licensees of your products to embed the Notice in object code and on the title pages or relevant documentation. The Notice is as follows: Copyright (c) 20xx GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Unless GoAhead otherwise instructs, the year 20xx is to be replaced with the year during which the release of the Original Code containing the notice is issued by GoAhead. If this year is not supplied with Documentation, GoAhead will supply it upon request. NBG4615 Users Guide 351 Appendix H Open Software Announcements 4.4 No Modifications to Server Identification Field. You agree not to remove or modify the Server identification Field contained in the Response Header as defined in Section 1.6 and 1.7. 5. Warranty Disclaimers. THE ORIGINAL CODE, THE DOCUMENTATION AND THE MEDIA UPON WHICH THE ORIGINAL CODE IS RECORDED (IF ANY) ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, STATUTORY OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the Original Code

(including any Modifications You make) and the Documentation is with You. Should the Original Code or the Documentation prove defective, You (and not GoAhead or its distributors, licensors or dealers) assume the entire cost of all necessary servicing or repair. GoAhead does not warrant that the functions contained in the Original Code will meet your requirements or operate in the combination that You may select for use, that the operation of the Original Code will be uninterrupted or error free, or that defects in the Original Code will be corrected. No oral or written statement by GoAhead or by a representative of GoAhead shall create a warranty or increase the scope of this warranty. GOAHEAD DOES NOT WARRANT THE ORIGINAL CODE AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OR THE LIKE WITH RESPECT TO ANY COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADE SECRET, TRADEMARK OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT OF ANY THIRD PARTY AND DOES NOT WARRANT 352 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements THAT THE ORIGINAL CODE DOES NOT INCLUDE ANY VIRUS, SOFTWARE ROUTINE OR OTHER SOFTWARE DESIGNED TO PERMIT UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS, TO DISABLE, ERASE OR OTHERWISE HARM SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DATA, OR TO PERFORM ANY OTHER SUCH ACTIONS. Any warranties that by law survive the foregoing disclaimers shall terminate ninety (90) days from the date You received the Original Code. 6. Limitation of Liability. YOUR SOLE REMEDIES AND GOAHEAD'S ENTIRE LIABILITY ARE SET FORTH ABOVE. IN NO EVENT WILL GOAHEAD OR ITS DISTRIBUTORS OR DEALERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE ORIGINAL CODE, THE INABILITY TO USE THE ORIGINAL CODE, OR ANY DEFECT IN THE ORIGINAL CODE, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, EVEN IF THEY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. You agree that GoAhead and its distributors and dealers will not be LIABLE for defense or indemnity with respect to any claim against You by any third party arising from your possession or use of the Original Code or the Documentation. NBG4615 Users Guide 353 Appendix H Open Software Announcements In no event will GoAhead? total liability to You for all damages, losses, and causes of action (whether in contract, tort, including negligence, or otherwise) exceed the amount You paid for this product. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, AND SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. 7. Indemnification by You. You agree to indemnify and hold GoAhead harmless against any and all claims, losses, damages and costs (including legal expenses and reasonable counsel fees) arising out of any claim of a third party with respect to the contents of the Your products, and any intellectual property rights or other rights or interests related thereto. 8. High Risk Activities. The Original Code is not fault-tolerant and is not designed , manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation 354 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines or weapons systems, in which the failure of the Original Code could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. GoAhead and its suppliers specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for any high risk uses listed above. 9. Government Restricted Rights. For units of the Department of Defense, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph

(c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013. Contractor/manufacturer is GoAhead Software, Inc., 10900 N.E. 8th Street, Suite 750, Bellevue, Washington 98004. If the Commercial Computer Software Restricted rights clause at FAR 52.227-19 or its successors apply, the Software and Documentation constitute restricted computer software as defined in that clause and the Government shall not have the license for published software set forth in subparagraph (c)(3) of that clause. The Original Code (i) was developed at private expense, and no part of it was developed with governmental funds; (ii) is a trade secret of GoAhead

(or its licensor(s)) for all purposes of the Freedom of Information Act;

(iii) is "restricted computer software" subject to limited utilization as NBG4615 Users Guide 355 Appendix H Open Software Announcements provided in the contract between the vendor and the governmental entity;

and (iv) in all respects is proprietary data belonging solely to GoAhead

(or its licensor(s)). 10. Governing Law and Interpretation. This Agreement shall be interpreted under and governed by the laws of the State of Washington, without regard to its rules governing the conflict of laws. If any provision of this Agreement is held illegal or unenforceable by a court or tribunal of competent jurisdiction, the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall remain in effect and the invalid provision deemed modified to the least degree necessary to remedy such invalidity. 11. Entire Agreement. This Agreement is the complete agreement between GoAhead and You and supersedes all prior agreements, oral or written, with respect to the subject matter hereof. If You have any questions concerning this Agreement, You may write to GoAhead Software, Inc., 10900 N.E. 8th Street, Suite 750, Bellevue, Washington 98004 or send e-mail to info@goahead.com. BY CLICKING ON THE "Register" BUTTON ON THE REGISTRATION FORM, YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET 356 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO ACCEPT THIS LICENSE OR YOU DO NOT QUALIFY FOR A LICENSE BASED ON THE TERMS SET FORTH ABOVE, YOU MUST NOT CLICK THE "Register" BUTTON. Exhibit A GoAhead Trademarks, Logos, and Product Designation Information 01/28/00 This Product includes LLTD software under below license LICENSE NOTICE. Use of the Microsoft Windows Rally Development Kit is covered under the Microsoft Windows Rally Development Kit License Agreement, which is provided within the Microsoft Windows Rally Development Kit or at http://

www.microsoft.com/whdc/rally/rallykit.mspx. If you want a license from Microsoft to use the software in the Microsoft Windows Rally Development Kit, you must (1) complete the designated "licensee" information in the Windows Rally Development Kit License Agreement, and (2) sign and return the Agreement AS IS to Microsoft at the address provided in the Agreement. This Product includes ntpclient software under below license ntpclient is Copyright 1997, 1999, 2000, 2003, 2006, 2007 Larry Doolittle, and may be freely copied and modified according to the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2. If you want to distribute ntpclient under other terms, contact me. I might agree to some other arrangement, if you talk to me _before_ you start violating GPL terms. NBG4615 Users Guide 357 Appendix H Open Software Announcements This Product includes igmpproxy software under below license igmpproxy - IGMP proxy based multicast router Copyright (C) 2005 Johnny Egeland <johnny@rlo.org>

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or

(at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA This software is derived work from the following software. The original source code has been modified from it's original state by the author of igmpproxy. smcroute 0.92 - Copyright (C) 2001 Carsten Schill <carsten@cschill.de>

358 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements

- Licensed under the GNU General Public License, version 2 mrouted 3.9-beta3 - COPYRIGHT 1989 by The Board of Trustees of Leland Stanford Junior University.

-Original license can be found in the Stanford.txt file. This Product includes openssl software under below license LICENSE ISSUES

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. OpenSSL License

* Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions

* are met:

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright NBG4615 Users Guide 359 Appendix H Open Software Announcements

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in

* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

* distribution.

* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this

* software must display the following acknowledgment:

* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project

* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to

* endorse or promote products derived from this software without

* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact

* openssl-core@openssl.org.

* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"

* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written

* permission of the OpenSSL Project.

* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following

* acknowledgment:

* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project

* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

360 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY

* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR

* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT

* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED

* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim

* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License

* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)

* All rights reserved.

* This package is an SSL implementation written

* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. NBG4615 Users Guide 361 Appendix H Open Software Announcements

* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as

* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions

* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,

* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation

* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms

* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in

* the code are not to be removed.

* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution

* as the author of the parts of the library used.

* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or

* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions

* are met:

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software

* must display the following acknowledgement:

362 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements

* "This product includes cryptographic software written by

* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"

* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library

* being used are not cryptographic related :-).

* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from

* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND

* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS

* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

* SUCH DAMAGE.

NBG4615 Users Guide 363 Appendix H Open Software Announcements

* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or

* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be

* copied and put under another distribution licence

* [including the GNU Public Licence.]

This Product includes ppp software under below license Copyrights:

All of the code can be freely used and redistributed. The individual source files each have their own copyright and permission notice. Pppd, pppstats and pppdump are under BSD-style notices. Some of the pppd plugins are GPL'd. Chat is public domain. The BSD license Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER>

All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

"Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

"Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

"Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. 364 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This Product includes radvd software under below license The author(s) grant permission for redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, of the software and documentation provided that the following conditions are met:

0. If you receive a version of the software that is specifically labelled as not being for redistribution (check the version message and/or README), you are not permitted to redistribute that version of the software in any way or form. 1. All terms of all other applicable copyrights and licenses must be followed. 2. Redistributions of source code must retain the authors' copyright notice(s), this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer. 3. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the authors' copyright notice(s), this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 4. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement with the name(s) of the NBG4615 Users Guide 365 Appendix H Open Software Announcements authors as specified in the copyright notice(s) substituted where indicated:

This product includes software developed by the authors which are mentioned at the start of the source files and other contributors. 5. Neither the name(s) of the author(s) nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ITS AUTHORS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''

AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 366 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements This Product includes rp-l2pt software under below license Copying All software included in this package is Copyright 2002 Roaring Penguin Software Inc. You may distribute it under the terms of the GNU General Public License (the "GPL"), Version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This Product includes zlib software under below license Copyright notice:

(C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be NBG4615 Users Guide 367 Appendix H Open Software Announcements appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler jloup@gzip.org madler@alumni.caltech.edu If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not*

receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-party code. If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for more information on the distribution of modified source versions. This Product includes libupnp software under below license Copyright (c) 2000-2003 Intel Corporation All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without 368 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS

``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. NBG4615 Users Guide 369 Appendix H Open Software Announcements This Product includes uClibc software under LGPL 2.1 license GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. 370 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and

(2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free NBG4615 Users Guide 371 Appendix H Open Software Announcements libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/

Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users'

freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a

"work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/

or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)

"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a 372 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

"a) The modified work must itself be a software library.

"b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

"c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

"d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. NBG4615 Users Guide 373 Appendix H Open Software Announcements Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-

readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a

"work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library 374 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:

"a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work

(which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)

"b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. NBG4615 Users Guide 375 Appendix H Open Software Announcements

"c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.

"d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.

"e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:

"a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.

"b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or 376 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/

donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. NBG4615 Users Guide 377 Appendix H Open Software Announcements 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/

OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS 378 NBG4615 Users Guide APPENDIX I Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. TradeMarks NetUSB is a trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. NBG4615 Users Guide 379 Appendix I Legal Information This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-

limited to channels 1 through 11. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

this device may not cause interference and this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device NBG4615 Users Guide 1 2 380 Appendix I Legal Information This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi and 5dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication. IMPORTANT NOTE:

IC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.

Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. NBG4615 Users Guide 381 Appendix I Legal Information Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com. 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page. 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://

www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. 382 NBG4615 Users Guide End-User License Agreement Appendix I Legal Information WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL, INC. IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU, IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. 1 Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-

sublicense, non-transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"), including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for internal business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are disclaimed. 2 Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software, Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement. 3 Copyright The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by United States Copyright Law and trade secret law, and by international treaty provisions. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation. 4 Restrictions You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software. Certain components of the Software, and third party open source NBG4615 Users Guide 383 Appendix I Legal Information programs included with the Software, have been or may be made available by ZyXEL on its Open Source web site (ftp://opensource.zyxel.com) (collectively the

"Open-Sourced Components") You may modify or replace only these Open-

Sourced Components; provided that you comply with the terms of this License and any applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open-Sourced Components. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance, technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer, decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License, by applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open-Sourced Components, or by applicable law, you may not market, co-brand, private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the online electronic documentation for the Software (ftp://opensource.zyxel.com), and your use of such material is governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software. Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products. 5 Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software. 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION, OR THAT ANY 384 NBG4615 Users Guide Appendix I Legal Information DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE, BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCTS PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8. 9 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. 10 Termination NBG4615 Users Guide 385 Appendix I Legal Information This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement. 11 General This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan. This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties. Note: Some components of this product incorporate source code covered under the Apache License, GPL License, LGPL License, Sun License, and Castor License. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please check ftp://opensource.zyxel.com to get it. 386 NBG4615 Users Guide Index Index viewing 382 Channel 75, 85, 93 channel 130, 307 interference 307 Configuration restore 232 content filtering 201 by keyword (in URL) 201 copyright 379 CPU usage 76, 85, 93, 103 CTS (Clear to Send) 308 D Daylight saving 229 DDNS 187 see also Dynamic DNS service providers 188 DHCP 56, 173 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server 170, 173 DHCP table 56 DHCP client information DHCP status Dimensions 249 disclaimer 379 DNS 175 DNS Server 154 DNS server 175 Domain Name System 175 Domain Name System. See DNS. duplex setting 76, 86, 103 Dynamic DNS 187 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 173 dynamic WEP key exchange 314 DynDNS 188 DynDNS see also DDNS 188 387 A Address Assignment 154 Advanced Encryption Standard See AES. AES 315 alternative subnet mask notation 268 antenna directional 320 gain 319 omni-directional 320 AP 21 AP (access point) 307 AP Mode menu 86, 94, 103 status screen 84 AP+Bridge 21 Auto-bridge 166, 167 B Bandwidth management overview 205 priority 208 services 212 Basic Service Set, See BSS 305 BitTorrent 213 Bridge/Repeater 21 bridged APs, security 133 BSS 305 C CA 313 Certificate Authority See CA. certifications 379 notices 381 NBG4615 Users Guide Index DynDNS Wildcard 187 E EAP Authentication 312 encryption 132, 315 and local (user) database 132 key 133 WPA compatible 132 ESS 306 ESSID 244 Extended Service Set, See ESS 306 F FCC interference statement 379 File Transfer Program 212 Firewall 196 Firewall overview guidelines 197 ICMP packets 198 network security Stateful inspection 196 ZyXEL device firewall 196 firewall stateful inspection 195 Firmware upload 230 file extension using HTTP firmware version 75 fragmentation threshold 309 FTP. see also File Transfer Program 212 G General wireless LAN screen 133 H hidden node 307 388 HTTP 212 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 212 I IANA 273 IBSS 305 IEEE 802.11g 309 IGMP 155 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version IGMP version 155 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 305 initialization vector (IV) 315 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 273 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 155 Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6 IP Address 171, 172, 181 IP Pool 174 IPv6 325 addressing 149, 325 EUI-64 327 global address 326 interface ID 327 link-local address 326 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 325 ping 325 prefix 149, 325 prefix length 149, 325 stateless autoconfiguration 328 unspecified address 326 L LAN 169 IP pool setup 170 LAN overview 169 LAN setup 169 LAN TCP/IP 170 Language 233 Link type 76, 85, 93, 103 NBG4615 Users Guide local (user) database 131 and encryption 132 Local Area Network 169 M MAC 139 MAC address 131, 155 cloning 155 MAC address filter 131 MAC address filtering 139 MAC filter 139 managing the device good habits 22 using the web configurator. See web configurator. using the WPS. See WPS. MBSSID 21 Media access control 139 Memory usage 76, 85, 93, 103 Message Integrity Check (MIC) 315 mode 21 Multicast 155 IGMP 155 N NAT 177, 180, 273 global 178 how it works 179 inside 178 local 178 outside 178 overview 177 port forwarding 184 see also Network Address Translation server 179 server sets 184 NAT Traversal 217 Navigation Panel 77, 86, 94, 103 navigation panel 77, 86, 94, 103 Network Address Translation 177, 180 Index O Operating Channel 76, 85, 93 operating mode 21 P P2P 213 Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 315, 317 peer-to-peer 213 Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 158 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 160 Pool Size 174 Port forwarding 181, 184 default server 184 example 184 local server 181 port numbers services port speed 76, 86, 93, 103 Power Specification 249 PPPoE 158 dial-up connection PPTP 160 preamble mode 309 product registration 382 PSK 315 Q Quality of Service (QoS) 141 R RADIUS 311 message types 311 messages 311 shared secret key 312 RADIUS server 131 registration product 382 NBG4615 Users Guide 389 Index related documentation 3 Remote management and NAT 215 limitations 215 system timeout 216 Reset button 51 Reset the device 51 Restore configuration 232 RF (Radio Frequency) 250 RIP 193 Roaming 140 Router Mode status screen 74 RTS (Request To Send) 308 threshold 307, 308 RTS/CTS Threshold 130, 140, 141 S safety warnings 8 Scheduling 144 Service and port numbers 200, 211 Service Set 69, 134 Service Set IDentification 69, 134 Service Set IDentity. See SSID. Session Initiated Protocol 212 SIP 212 SSID 69, 75, 85, 93, 102, 130, 134 stateful inspection firewall 195 Static DHCP 175 Static Route 189 Status 74 subnet 265 Subnet Mask 171, 172 subnet mask 266 subnetting 268 Summary DHCP table 56 Packet statistics 57 Wireless station status 58 syntax conventions 6 System General Setup 226 System restart 233 T TCP/IP configuration 173 Temperature 250 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) 315 Time setting 228 trigger port 185 Trigger port forwarding 185 example 186 process 186 U Universal 89 Universal Plug and Play 217 Application 217 Security issues 218 Universal Repeater 89, 94 Universal Repeater Mode status screen 92 UPnP 217 URL Keyword Blocking 203 user authentication 131 local (user) database 131 RADIUS server 131 User Name 188 V VoIP 212 VPN 160 W WAN (Wide Area Network) 153 WAN advanced 166 WAN MAC address 155 warranty 382 note 382 Web Configurator how to access 47 390 NBG4615 Users Guide Index Overview 47 web configurator 22 WEP Encryption 95, 96, 97, 106, 107, 137, 138 WEP encryption 136 WEP key 136 Wi-Fi Protected Access 314 Wildcard 187 Wireless association list 58 wireless channel 244 wireless client WPA supplicants 316 wireless LAN 244 wireless LAN scheduling 144 Wireless network WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 314 WPA2-PSK 314, 315 application example 317 WPA-PSK 315 application example 317 WPS 22 WWW 212 X Xbox Live 213 basic guidelines 130 channel 130 encryption 132 example 129 MAC address filter 131 overview 129 security 130 SSID 130 Wireless security 130 overview 130 type 130 wireless security 244, 310 Wireless tutorial 111 WISP Mode status screen 101 Wizard setup 35 WLAN interference 307 security parameters 318 World Wide Web 212 WPA 314 key caching 316 pre-authentication 316 user authentication 316 vs WPA-PSK 315 wireless client supplicant 316 with RADIUS application example 316 WPA compatible 132 WPA2 314 user authentication 316 vs WPA2-PSK 315 wireless client supplicant 316 with RADIUS application example 316 NBG4615 Users Guide 391 Index 392 NBG4615 Users Guide

Model Number : NBG4615 Power Rating:12V== 1.5A Power Consumption:15 Watt max. FCC ID: I88NBG4615 IC: 2468C-NBG4615 IP Address:192,.168.1.1 Password:1234 SSID:ZyXEL La Bo = OBO}

a to POWER adapter Connect to PC Connect to Broadband modem Connect to USB mass storage device This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. N62s Operation is subject to the following two conditions: FC i)

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. C

~Y ZyXEL Communications Corporation Made in Taiwan |